860 DSP and 860 Dspi Operation Manual Discontinued Manuals User Guides en

860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Multifunction Interactive
Cable Analyzer
OPERATION
MANUAL
Table of
Contents
Section II: Section III:

Section I:
Installer Service
The Basics
Functions Functions
Section IV: Section V:

Setup Utility
Functions Functions
Section VI:
Appendix
Trilithic Company Profile
Trilithic is a privately held manufacturer founded in 1986 as an engineering and assembly
company that built and designed customer-directed products for telecommunications, military and
industrial customers. From its modest beginnings as a two-man engineering team, Trilithic grew
over the years and broadened its offerings of RF and microwave components by adding
broadband solutions to its product line. This was accomplished with the acquisition of
components manufacturer Cir-Q-Tel and instruments manufacturer Texscan.
Today, Trilithic is an industry leader providing telecommunications solutions for major broadband,
RF and microwave markets around the world. As an ISO 9000:2001 certified company with over
40 years of collective expertise in engineering and custom assembly, Trilithic is dedicated to
providing quality products, services, and communications solutions that exceed customer
expectations.
Trilithic is comprised of five major divisions:
• Broadband Instruments and Systems
Offers test, analysis, and quality management solutions for the major cable television
systems worldwide.
• RF Microwave Components
Provides components and custom subsystems for companies specializing in cellular,
military, and other wireless applications.
• Emergency Alert Systems
Leading supplier of government-mandated emergency alert systems used by broadcast
TV, cable TV, IPTV, DBS, and radio stations.
• XFTP
Offers a specialty line of field technical products for cable operators and technicians, as
well as a line of products for installing electronics in the home of the future.
• Network Services
Provides network data management and support services to safeguard and protect your
network and data by employing certified, experienced, and dedicated network engineers.
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual

Table of Contents
Section I: The Basics .................................................................................... 1.1
1. General Information ........................................................................................................... 1.2
Helpful Website .................................................................................................................. 1.2
Where to Get Technical Support .......................................................................................... 1.2
How this Manual is Organized ............................................................................................. 1.3
Conventions Used in this Manual ........................................................................................ 1.4
Precautions ........................................................................................................................ 1.4
Recommended Software and Hardware ............................................................................. 1.5
2. Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 1.7
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1.7
860 DSP and 860 DSPi Base Models ................................................................................ 1.7
Features ............................................................................................................................. 1.8
Adaptability ................................................................................................................... 1.8
Durability and Convenience ........................................................................................... 1.8
User Friendly ................................................................................................................. 1.8
Standard Functions ....................................................................................................... 1.8
WorkBench Software .......................................................................................................... 1.9
Configuration ................................................................................................................. 1.9
Data File Transfer .......................................................................................................... 1.9
Updates and Adding Options ......................................................................................... 1.9
3. Getting to Know Your 860 DSPi ...................................................................................... 1.10
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1.10
Battery Charging ............................................................................................................... 1.11
Replacing the Battery .................................................................................................. 1.11
The Display Screen .......................................................................................................... 1.12
Title Bar ....................................................................................................................... 1.12
Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 1.13
Main Display Area ....................................................................................................... 1.13
Message Bar .............................................................................................................. 1.13
Softkey Labels ............................................................................................................ 1.14
Input/Output Helper Icons ............................................................................................. 1.14
4. Basic Navigation.............................................................................................................. 1.15
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1.15
Let’s Get Started!.............................................................................................................. 1.15
Arrow Buttons .............................................................................................................. 1.16
Alphanumeric Keyboard .............................................................................................. 1.16
Selecting Menu Icons ........................................................................................................ 1.16
Using Softkeys .................................................................................................................. 1.17
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

i
Using Red Operation Buttons ............................................................................................ 1.18
Enter Button ................................................................................................................ 1.18
Back Button ................................................................................................................. 1.18
Function Button ........................................................................................................... 1.18
Using the Alphanumeric Keypad ....................................................................................... 1.19
5. Initial Setup ...................................................................................................................... 1.20
6. Basic Function Menu Options ........................................................................................ 1.21
Contrast / Freeze .............................................................................................................. 1.21
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1.21
Screen Capture ................................................................................................................ 1.22
Context Help ..................................................................................................................... 1.23
Save Data Log ................................................................................................................. 1.24
Location ...................................................................................................................... 1.25
Task ............................................................................................................................ 1.25
File Name ................................................................................................................... 1.26
Select Network Port .......................................................................................................... 1.26
7. Remote Control Mode ..................................................................................................... 1.28
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1.28
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 1.28
Logging on to the Network ................................................................................................ 1.29
Internal Cable Modem ................................................................................................. 1.29
External RJ45 Port ...................................................................................................... 1.30
Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................... 1.30
Remote Control Mode Operation ...................................................................................... 1.31
8. 860 DSPi RTP Reflector Option ...................................................................................... 1.32
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1.32
PP-30 Test Probe ........................................................................................................ 1.32
860 DSPi Web Browser Configuration ............................................................................. 1.33
Test Procedure ................................................................................................................. 1.34
Accessing the PocketDQ Application................................................................................ 1.34
Searching for Previously Run Tests ................................................................................... 1.35
Packet Information ............................................................................................................ 1.37
Burst Information ............................................................................................................... 1.38
Test Data Management ..................................................................................................... 1.39
RTP Statistics Information ................................................................................................. 1.39

ii
9. Secure860Link ................................................................................................................. 1.40
SSL Certificate ................................................................................................................. 1.40
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1.40
Using Secure860Link ....................................................................................................... 1.41
Secure860Link Support .................................................................................................... 1.41
Enable/Disable S8L ......................................................................................................... 1.41
10. Instrument Fingerprint .................................................................................................. 1.42
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1.42
Instrument Fingerprint Serial Number ................................................................................ 1.42
Entering the Instrument Fingerprint Serial Number ............................................................. 1.43
Asset ID ............................................................................................................................ 1.44
Entering the Asset ID ........................................................................................................ 1.44
11. Firmware Upgrade Instructions .................................................................................... 1.45
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1.45
Serial Connection ............................................................................................................. 1.45
Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 1.45
Upgrade Firmware ...................................................................................................... 1.45
Ethernet Connection ......................................................................................................... 1.46
Using a Router ............................................................................................................ 1.46
Cross-Over Cable Connection .......................................................................................... 1.51
Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 1.51
Configure the PC to Use a Static IP Address ............................................................... 1.51
Configure the 860 DSPi for a Static IP Address Using the External RJ45 Port ............. 1.52
12. Optional Software and Hardware ................................................................................. 1.55
Optional Software Features .............................................................................................. 1.55
Upgrade Options For Existing Equipment ......................................................................... 1.64
Section II: Installer Functions ...................................................................... 2.1
1. Installer Functions Overview ............................................................................................ 2.2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 2.2
2. Level Mode ......................................................................................................................... 2.7
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 2.7
Required Setup .................................................................................................................. 2.7
Setting Reference Level ...................................................................................................... 2.8
Setting Vertical Resolution .................................................................................................. 2.8
Adjusting Channels and Frequencies .................................................................................. 2.8
Setting Channel Plan .......................................................................................................... 2.9
Changing Frequency Step Size ........................................................................................... 2.9

iii
Using the Goto Function .................................................................................................... 2.10
Goto Spectrum ............................................................................................................ 2.10
Goto Scan ................................................................................................................... 2.11
Goto QAM ................................................................................................................... 2.12
Function Menu Options ..................................................................................................... 2.13
Basic Function Menu Options ...................................................................................... 2.13
Auto Range Option ...................................................................................................... 2.13
Set Test Point Compensation Feature ......................................................................... 2.14
3. QAM Mode ........................................................................................................................ 2.15
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.15
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.16
Setting Channel Plan ........................................................................................................ 2.17
Adjusting Channels and Frequencies ................................................................................ 2.17
Setting the Display Mode .................................................................................................. 2.18
Using the Bar Graph Display ....................................................................................... 2.18
Changing Digital Modulation Settings ............................................................................... 2.18
Using the Constellation Display ................................................................................... 2.19
Using the Equalizer Tap Diagram ................................................................................ 2.20
Using the BER Graph .................................................................................................. 2.20
Set Test Point Compensation Option ........................................................................... 2.22
4. Spectrum Mode................................................................................................................ 2.23
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.23
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.24
Setting Reference Level .................................................................................................... 2.25
Setting Resolution Bandwidth ........................................................................................... 2.26
Setting Amplitude Limits ................................................................................................... 2.27
Setting Vertical Resolution ................................................................................................ 2.27
Detector Settings .............................................................................................................. 2.28
Marker Settings ................................................................................................................ 2.29
Setting Frequency Parameters ......................................................................................... 2.30
Center/Span ................................................................................................................ 2.30
Start/Stop .................................................................................................................... 2.31
Channel ....................................................................................................................... 2.32
Zero Span Measurements ................................................................................................. 2.33
Setting Triggers ........................................................................................................... 2.34
Trigger Modes ............................................................................................................. 2.34
Setting Markers ........................................................................................................... 2.35

iv
Hold Settings .................................................................................................................... 2.36
None ........................................................................................................................... 2.36
Max ............................................................................................................................. 2.36
Min .............................................................................................................................. 2.36
Toggle Peak Hold ........................................................................................................ 2.39
5. Tilt Mode ........................................................................................................................... 2.40
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.40
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.41
Setting the Low and High Tilt Channels ............................................................................. 2.42
Changing Display Mode ................................................................................................... 2.43
6. CM Stat Mode (DOCSIS 2.0) ............................................................................................ 2.47
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.47
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.47
Measurement Data ........................................................................................................... 2.48
Goto Throughput .......................................................................................................... 2.49
Goto PING / LPR ......................................................................................................... 2.50
7. CM Stat Mode (DOCSIS 3.0) ............................................................................................ 2.52
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.52
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.52

v
Goto Throughput .......................................................................................................... 2.54
Goto PING/ LPR .......................................................................................................... 2.55
8. PING Mode ....................................................................................................................... 2.57
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.57
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.58
External RJ45 Port ...................................................................................................... 2.59
Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................... 2.59
Entering a Host Name or IP............................................................................................... 2.60
Editing Packet Delay ........................................................................................................ 2.61
Editing Packet Size .......................................................................................................... 2.61
Pinging the Network Host .................................................................................................. 2.62
Viewing Modem Information .............................................................................................. 2.62
Clear Favorites ........................................................................................................... 2.63
Display CPE IP ........................................................................................................... 2.64
9. Trace Route Mode ........................................................................................................... 2.65
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.65
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.65
Trace Route Mode Support ............................................................................................... 2.66
Entering a Host Name or IP............................................................................................... 2.67
Function Menu Options ................................................................................................ 2.68
10. VoIP Mode ...................................................................................................................... 2.69
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.69
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.70
External RJ45 Port ...................................................................................................... 2.71
Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................... 2.72
Entering the Server IP ....................................................................................................... 2.72
Running a VoIP Test .......................................................................................................... 2.72
Viewing VoIP Test Details ................................................................................................. 2.73

vi
Display CPE IP ........................................................................................................... 2.74
High Priority On/Off ...................................................................................................... 2.74
11. Thru Put Mode................................................................................................................ 2.75
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.75
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.76
External RJ45 Port ...................................................................................................... 2.77
Setting the Server IP ......................................................................................................... 2.78
Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................... 2.78
Setting the Downstream File ............................................................................................. 2.79
Running an Upstream Test ................................................................................................ 2.79
Running a Downstream Test .............................................................................................. 2.80
Goto Ping / LPR .......................................................................................................... 2.81
Viewing Modem Information .............................................................................................. 2.81
Change HTTP Port ...................................................................................................... 2.83
Change TFTP Port ...................................................................................................... 2.84
Change UDP Port ....................................................................................................... 2.85
Display CPE IP ........................................................................................................... 2.86
Display IP .................................................................................................................... 2.87
12. BER Mode ...................................................................................................................... 2.88
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.88
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.89
Adjusting Channels ........................................................................................................... 2.89
Adjusting Time Scale ........................................................................................................ 2.89
Resetting BER Test ........................................................................................................... 2.90
Viewing Test Results ......................................................................................................... 2.91
13. Web Test Mode .............................................................................................................. 2.93
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.93
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.94
Performing Web Test ........................................................................................................ 2.94

vii
Browser Refresh ......................................................................................................... 2.95
14. Web Browser Mode ....................................................................................................... 2.96
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 2.96
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 2.97
Browser Overview ............................................................................................................. 2.98
Title Bar ....................................................................................................................... 2.98
URL Bar ...................................................................................................................... 2.98
Main Display Area ....................................................................................................... 2.98
Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 2.98
Softkey Bar ................................................................................................................. 2.98
Browser Navigation .......................................................................................................... 2.99
Selecting Links ............................................................................................................ 2.99
Scrolling Web Pages................................................................................................... 2.99
Entering Data .............................................................................................................. 2.99
Function Menu Options ................................................................................................... 2.100
Basic Function Menu Options .................................................................................... 2.100
Browser Back............................................................................................................ 2.101
Browser Forward ....................................................................................................... 2.101
Browser Refresh ....................................................................................................... 2.101
Browser Home .......................................................................................................... 2.102
Offline Browsing ........................................................................................................ 2.102
Clear Offline Cache ................................................................................................... 2.103
15. Auto Test Mode ............................................................................................................ 2.104
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 2.104
Required Setup .............................................................................................................. 2.104
Creating Auto Test Macros .............................................................................................. 2.105
Create New Macro .................................................................................................... 2.105
Selecting Type of Test ................................................................................................ 2.106
Selecting a Channel Plan .......................................................................................... 2.107
Select an IP Address ................................................................................................. 2.107
Selecting a Schedule Type ........................................................................................ 2.108
Setting Test Parameters ............................................................................................ 2.108
Setting Test Limits ..................................................................................................... 2.112
Saving Macros .......................................................................................................... 2.118
Copying Macros ........................................................................................................ 2.118
Deleting Macros ........................................................................................................ 2.118

viii
Running Auto Test Macros ............................................................................................... 2.119
Immediate Execution ................................................................................................. 2.119
Interval / Count Execution ........................................................................................... 2.120
Specified Times Execution ........................................................................................ 2.124
16. Auto Test Results Mode .............................................................................................. 2.128
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 2.128
Required Setup .............................................................................................................. 2.128
Viewing Auto Test Results ............................................................................................... 2.129
Section III: Service Functions ..................................................................... 3.1
1. Service Functions Overview ............................................................................................. 3.2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 3.2
2. Hum Mode .......................................................................................................................... 3.6
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 3.6
Required Setup .................................................................................................................. 3.7
Adjusting Channels ............................................................................................................. 3.7
Setting Channel Plan .......................................................................................................... 3.7
Using the Goto Function ...................................................................................................... 3.8
Goto Spectrum .............................................................................................................. 3.8
Goto Scan ..................................................................................................................... 3.9
3. C/N Mode .......................................................................................................................... 3.11
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.11
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.12
Goto Spectrum ............................................................................................................ 3.14
Goto Scan ................................................................................................................... 3.15

ix
4. Mod Mode ......................................................................................................................... 3.18
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.18
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.19
Using the Audio Function .................................................................................................. 3.20
5. CSO/CTB Mode ................................................................................................................ 3.21
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.21
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.22
Measuring CSO/CTB ........................................................................................................ 3.23
Method #1 ................................................................................................................... 3.24
Method #2 ................................................................................................................... 3.25
6. Scan Mode ....................................................................................................................... 3.28
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.28
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.29
Setting Scan Limit Set and Viewing Limits ........................................................................ 3.31
Goto Level ................................................................................................................... 3.32
Goto Spectrum ............................................................................................................ 3.33
Turn Averaging On/Off .................................................................................................. 3.36

x
7. FM Dev Mode ................................................................................................................... 3.38
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.38
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.38
Setting Volume Level ........................................................................................................ 3.39
8. Sweep Mode .................................................................................................................... 3.41
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.41
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.42
Setting Averaging Type ..................................................................................................... 3.43
Setting Test Point Profile ................................................................................................... 3.45
Setting TAP Offset Value................................................................................................... 3.45
Setting Low Gain .............................................................................................................. 3.45
Setting High Gain.............................................................................................................. 3.46
Marker Settings ................................................................................................................ 3.46
Capturing a Reference Scan ............................................................................................. 3.47
Sweeping an Amplifier ...................................................................................................... 3.48
When Taking Reference............................................................................................... 3.49
When Using Reference ................................................................................................ 3.49
Distance to Fault Option .............................................................................................. 3.51
Use 8300 FST ............................................................................................................. 3.52
9. SSR Mode ........................................................................................................................ 3.53
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.53
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.55
Using the SSR Mode ........................................................................................................ 3.56
Adjusting Node ................................................................................................................. 3.56
Adjusting Tx Level ............................................................................................................. 3.57
Using Variable Markers .................................................................................................... 3.57
Using the Compare Function ............................................................................................ 3.58
Sweep Graph .............................................................................................................. 3.58
Local + Headend Graph .............................................................................................. 3.59
Local Only Graph ......................................................................................................... 3.60

xi
Saving a Reference Scan ................................................................................................. 3.60
Using a Reference Scan ................................................................................................... 3.61
Goto Spectrum 42 ....................................................................................................... 3.61
Goto Spectrum 65 ....................................................................................................... 3.62
Goto Spectrum FSK .................................................................................................... 3.63
Adjusting Rx Link Frequency ............................................................................................. 3.64
Viewing the Tx Frequencies .............................................................................................. 3.64
Toggle Peak Hold ........................................................................................................ 3.66
Changing Display Mode .............................................................................................. 3.66
10. RSA Mode ....................................................................................................................... 3.67
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.67
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.68
Using RSA Mode .............................................................................................................. 3.69
Changing Display Resolution ............................................................................................ 3.70
Setting Spectrum Limit Frequencies ................................................................................. 3.70
Instrument Unit Designation............................................................................................... 3.71
Setting Test Point Level ..................................................................................................... 3.71
Marker Settings ................................................................................................................ 3.72
Capturing a Reference Scan ............................................................................................. 3.73
Sweeping an Amplifier ...................................................................................................... 3.73
Changing Display Mode .............................................................................................. 3.76
Setting TP Compensation ........................................................................................... 3.77
Toggle Ingress View .................................................................................................... 3.78
Toggle Peak Hold ........................................................................................................ 3.79
11. RSVP Mode .................................................................................................................... 3.80
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.80
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.81
Using RSVP Mode ........................................................................................................... 3.82
Goto Spectrum 42 ....................................................................................................... 3.83
Goto Spectrum 65 ....................................................................................................... 3.84
Goto Spectrum FSK .................................................................................................... 3.85

xii
Viewing the Tx Frequencies .............................................................................................. 3.86
12. VSB Mode ...................................................................................................................... 3.88
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.88
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.88
Setting Frequency ............................................................................................................. 3.89
Selecting Modulation Type ................................................................................................ 3.89
Changing Symbol Rate ..................................................................................................... 3.90
Changing Bandwidth ......................................................................................................... 3.90
Setting the Display Mode .................................................................................................. 3.91
Using the Constellation Display ................................................................................... 3.91
Using the Equalizer Tap Diagram ................................................................................ 3.92
Using the BER Graph .................................................................................................. 3.92
Set TP Compensation ................................................................................................. 3.93
13. VITS Mode ...................................................................................................................... 3.94
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3.94
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 3.94
Setting Averaging Type ..................................................................................................... 3.95
Setting Line Number ......................................................................................................... 3.95
Setting Even/Odd Fields ................................................................................................... 3.96
Setting Test Type .............................................................................................................. 3.96
Line Viewer ................................................................................................................. 3.96
Differential Gain and Phase ......................................................................................... 3.97
Chrominance-Luminance Delay ................................................................................... 3.98
In-Channel Response .................................................................................................. 3.99
Setting Channel Plan ...................................................................................................... 3.100
14. QAM EVS Mode ............................................................................................................ 3.101
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3.101
Required Setup .............................................................................................................. 3.101
Using QAM EVS Mode ................................................................................................... 3.102
Setting Reference Level .................................................................................................. 3.102
Adjusting Channels ......................................................................................................... 3.103
Setting Vertical Resolution .............................................................................................. 3.103
Adjusting Digital Frequency ............................................................................................ 3.103
Adjusting Marker ............................................................................................................. 3.104
Setting Channel Plan ...................................................................................................... 3.104

xiii
Set TP Compensation ............................................................................................... 3.105
15. TraffiControl Mode ....................................................................................................... 3.106
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3.106
Required Setup .............................................................................................................. 3.106
Using TraffiControl Mode ................................................................................................ 3.107
Setting Reference Level .................................................................................................. 3.107
Setting Vertical Resolution .............................................................................................. 3.108
Adjusting Digital Frequency ............................................................................................ 3.108
Adjusting Bandwidth Frequency ...................................................................................... 3.109
Adjusting Marker ............................................................................................................. 3.109
Adjusting Trigger ............................................................................................................. 3.109
Section IV: Setup Functions ........................................................................ 4.1
1. Setup Function Overview ................................................................................................. 4.2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 4.2
2. Instrument Setup Mode ..................................................................................................... 4.4
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 4.4
Global Settings ................................................................................................................... 4.5
Operator Name ............................................................................................................. 4.6
Company Name ............................................................................................................ 4.6
Keyboard Beeps ........................................................................................................... 4.6
Language ...................................................................................................................... 4.7
Current Date.................................................................................................................. 4.7
Current Time.................................................................................................................. 4.8
Web Server Port ........................................................................................................... 4.8
Web Server Offset ......................................................................................................... 4.9
Notepad Utility ............................................................................................................... 4.9
Screen Capture ........................................................................................................... 4.10
Measurement Settings ...................................................................................................... 4.11
Temperature Units ....................................................................................................... 4.12
Measurement Units ..................................................................................................... 4.12
Analog Noise BW ........................................................................................................ 4.13
Optimal Modulation ..................................................................................................... 4.13
Channel Spacing ......................................................................................................... 4.14
Hum Type (50/60 Hz) ................................................................................................... 4.14
Test point ..................................................................................................................... 4.15
Test point / Probe Value ............................................................................................... 4.15
Data Log Attachments ................................................................................................. 4.16

xiv
SSR Mode Settings .......................................................................................................... 4.17
SSR Tx Level .............................................................................................................. 4.18
SSR Link Frequency ................................................................................................... 4.18
RSA Link Frequency .................................................................................................... 4.19
SSR Sweep Carriers................................................................................................... 4.20
SSR Gain/Tilt Frequencies .......................................................................................... 4.20
SSR Unit ID (A-F) ........................................................................................................ 4.21
RSA Unit ID (A-J) ......................................................................................................... 4.21
SSR Local Input ........................................................................................................... 4.22
RSVP Mode Settings ....................................................................................................... 4.23
RSVP Maximum Tx Level ............................................................................................ 4.24
RSVP Link Frequency ................................................................................................. 4.25
RSVP Test Carriers ..................................................................................................... 4.25
RSVP C/I Threshold .................................................................................................... 4.26
RSVP C/I Bandwidth ................................................................................................... 4.26
RSVP C/I Samples ...................................................................................................... 4.27
RET Link Settings ............................................................................................................. 4.28
Method 1 - Manual Link Frequency .............................................................................. 4.29
Method 2 - Automatic Return Telemetry Frequency Search ........................................... 4.30
VoIP Settings .................................................................................................................... 4.31
Codec Type, Delay, and Bit Rate ................................................................................. 4.32
Packet Rate and Size .................................................................................................. 4.32
Jitter Buffer Delay ........................................................................................................ 4.33
Call Length .................................................................................................................. 4.33
Maximum Latency ....................................................................................................... 4.33
Maximum Jitter ............................................................................................................ 4.34
Minimum Mean Opinion Score (MOS) ......................................................................... 4.34
Scan Mode Settings ......................................................................................................... 4.35
Multi Ch Averaging ...................................................................................................... 4.36
Single Ch Averaging .................................................................................................... 4.36
Scan Limit Set and Setting Limits ................................................................................ 4.37
CSO / CTB Settings ......................................................................................................... 4.42
CSO/CTB Span ........................................................................................................... 4.43
CSO/CTB Offset #1 ..................................................................................................... 4.44
CSO/CTB Offset #2 ..................................................................................................... 4.45
CSO/CTB Offset #3 ..................................................................................................... 4.46
CSO/CTB Offset #4 ..................................................................................................... 4.47
CSO/CTB Offset #5 ..................................................................................................... 4.48

xv
FWD Sweep Settings ....................................................................................................... 4.49
Sweep Averaging ........................................................................................................ 4.50
Cable Velocity Factor .................................................................................................. 4.50
Test Point Number and Name ...................................................................................... 4.51
Low and High Pilot Value ............................................................................................. 4.52
TAP (Offset) Value ....................................................................................................... 4.53
8300 FST Channels .................................................................................................... 4.54
Digital Settings ................................................................................................................. 4.55
Symbols To Display ..................................................................................................... 4.56
MER / EVM Display ..................................................................................................... 4.56
QAM Demodulation ..................................................................................................... 4.57
BER Demodulation ..................................................................................................... 4.57
VSB Demodulation ..................................................................................................... 4.58
Error Vector Spectrum ................................................................................................. 4.58
COM/NET Settings ........................................................................................................... 4.59
Network Port ............................................................................................................... 4.60
Connection Speed ....................................................................................................... 4.60
My IP Address ............................................................................................................. 4.61
Subnet Mask ............................................................................................................... 4.61
Gateway Address ........................................................................................................ 4.62
Primary and Secondary DNS Addresses ..................................................................... 4.63
Activating Network ....................................................................................................... 4.63
Com 1 and Com 2 Baud Rate ..................................................................................... 4.64
Browser Settings .............................................................................................................. 4.65
Home Page ................................................................................................................. 4.66
Display Settings .......................................................................................................... 4.66
Browser Cookies ........................................................................................................ 4.67
CM/CPE Settings ............................................................................................................. 4.68
860 DSP CPE MAC Address...................................................................................... 4.69
Internal Cable Modem MAC Address ........................................................................... 4.72
Modem MAC Frequency ............................................................................................. 4.76
Wi-Fi Settings ................................................................................................................... 4.77
Learn Channel Plan Settings ............................................................................................. 4.78
Base Channel Plan ...................................................................................................... 4.79
Low and High Level Limits ........................................................................................... 4.80
Start and Stop Frequency ............................................................................................ 4.81
Learn Channel Plan ..................................................................................................... 4.82

xvi
Edit Channel Plan Settings ............................................................................................... 4.83
Loading a Channel Plan to Edit ................................................................................... 4.84
Saving Channel Plans ................................................................................................. 4.84
Deleting Channel Plans ............................................................................................... 4.85
Selecting a Channel Number and Channel Usage ........................................................ 4.86
Channel Name ............................................................................................................ 4.86
Channel Type .............................................................................................................. 4.87
Channel Details ........................................................................................................... 4.87
Video / Center ............................................................................................................. 4.88
Audio / Dig BW ........................................................................................................... 4.88
SAP / Symbol Rate ..................................................................................................... 4.89
Tilt, C/N, HUM, and Percent Modulation Settings .......................................................... 4.89
Create Location Settings .................................................................................................. 4.92
Location Type .............................................................................................................. 4.93
Location Area and Amplifier ID .................................................................................... 4.93
Power Configuration .................................................................................................... 4.94
Feeder Configuration .................................................................................................. 4.94
Trunk Termination ........................................................................................................ 4.94
Voltage Setting ............................................................................................................ 4.95
Reverse Pad ............................................................................................................... 4.95
Reverse Equalizer ....................................................................................................... 4.95
Forward Pad ............................................................................................................... 4.96
Forward Equalizer ....................................................................................................... 4.96
Saving Location Settings ............................................................................................. 4.96
3. Power Management Mode .............................................................................................. 4.98
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 4.98
Choosing a Power Scheme .............................................................................................. 4.99
Setting Processor Speed ................................................................................................ 4.100
Setting Backlight Level ................................................................................................... 4.100
Unit Off Timer .................................................................................................................. 4.101
Backlight Timer ............................................................................................................... 4.101
USB Power .................................................................................................................... 4.102
4. Explore Files Mode ........................................................................................................ 4.103
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4.103
Deleting Files ................................................................................................................. 4.104
Previewing Files ............................................................................................................. 4.104
Supported File Types ...................................................................................................... 4.105

xvii
Restore Factory Default Settings ............................................................................... 4.108
Restore Icons ............................................................................................................ 4.109
5. Instrument Information Mode ....................................................................................... 4.110
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4.110
Version Info ..................................................................................................................... 4.111
Calibration Info ................................................................................................................ 4.111
Communication Info ........................................................................................................ 4.112
Memory Info .................................................................................................................... 4.112
RF Option Info ................................................................................................................. 4.113
NET Option Info .............................................................................................................. 4.113
Cable Modem Info .......................................................................................................... 4.114
Performing a ScanDisk ................................................................................................... 4.114
Activating Rf Options ...................................................................................................... 4.115
Activating Net Options .................................................................................................... 4.116
Unit ID ............................................................................................................................. 4.117
Reboot Unit ............................................................................................................... 4.118
Section V: Utility Functions .......................................................................... 5.1
1. Utility Functions Overview ................................................................................................ 5.2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 5.2
2. Calendar Mode ................................................................................................................... 5.6
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 5.6
Required Setup .................................................................................................................. 5.6
Changing Months ................................................................................................................ 5.6
3. Notepad Mode.................................................................................................................... 5.7
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 5.7
Required Setup .................................................................................................................. 5.7
Opening Text Files .............................................................................................................. 5.8
Changing Display Font Size ................................................................................................ 5.8
Function Menu Options ....................................................................................................... 5.9
Web Browser Notepad ....................................................................................................... 5.9
4. Calculator Mode ............................................................................................................... 5.10
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 5.10
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.10
Performing Calculations .................................................................................................... 5.11

xviii
5. Tasks Mode ...................................................................................................................... 5.12
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5.12
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.12
Viewing Task Details ........................................................................................................ 5.13
New Task File .............................................................................................................. 5.14
Close Task File ........................................................................................................... 5.15
ReOpen Task File ........................................................................................................ 5.16
Delete Task File .......................................................................................................... 5.17
Task ID Length ............................................................................................................. 5.18
6. Line Mode ......................................................................................................................... 5.19
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5.19
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.19
Adjusting Channels and Frequencies ................................................................................ 5.20
Setting Line Number ......................................................................................................... 5.20
Setting Even/Odd Fields ................................................................................................... 5.21
Viewing Blank Lines ......................................................................................................... 5.22
7. CM Thru Mode .................................................................................................................. 5.24
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5.24
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.24
Logging on to The Network ............................................................................................... 5.25
8. FDR Mode ........................................................................................................................ 5.26
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5.26
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.26
Determine if FDR Mode is Available ................................................................................. 5.27
Using the FDR Mode ........................................................................................................ 5.28
Reference Level .......................................................................................................... 5.28
Velocity of Propagation (VoP)...................................................................................... 5.28
Step Size .................................................................................................................... 5.29
Marker Settings ........................................................................................................... 5.29
Calc VoP ..................................................................................................................... 5.30
Get VoP ...................................................................................................................... 5.30

xix
9. Source Mode .................................................................................................................... 5.32
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5.32
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.33
Using Source Mode .......................................................................................................... 5.33
Changing Frequency Step Size ......................................................................................... 5.36
Pulse Width ................................................................................................................. 5.37
10. QAM Source Mode ......................................................................................................... 5.38
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 5.38
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.38
Using QAM Source Mode ................................................................................................. 5.39
Changing Symbol Rate ..................................................................................................... 5.42
Changing Frequency Step Size ......................................................................................... 5.42
11. Wi-Fi Mode ...................................................................................................................... 5.44
Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g) in the 860 DSPi ................................................................................... 5.44
Required Setup ................................................................................................................ 5.44
Using the Wi-Fi Survey Mode ............................................................................................ 5.45
Using the Wi-Fi Mode ....................................................................................................... 5.46
Section VI: Appendix .................................................................................... 6.1
Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 6.2
Warranty Information ........................................................................................................... 6.6

xx
860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Cable Analyzer
Section I: The Basics

1. General Information 1

Helpful Website
The following website contains general information which may be of interest to you:
http://www.trilithic.com
Trilithic’s website contains product specifications and information, tips, release information,
marketing information, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), bulletins and other technical
information. You can also check this website for product updates.
The following website contains information about the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi which may be of
interest to you:
http://www.860DSP.com
Where to Get Technical Support

Trilithic technical support is available Monday through Friday from 8:00AM to 5:00PM EST.
Callers in North America can dial 1-317-895-3600 or 1-800-344-2412 (toll free). International
callers should dial 1-317-895-3600 or fax questions to 1-317-895-3613. You can also email
technical support at [email protected].
For quicker support response when calling or sending email, please provide the following
information:
• Your name and your company name
• The technical point of contact (name, phone number, email)
• The 860 DSPi serial number, firmware and hardware version numbers
• A detailed description of the problem you are having, including any error or information
messages
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Section I: The Basics
1.2
How this Manual is Organized
Thank you for choosing the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi. This manual is provided with the 860 DSP and
860 DSPi to help the user become better acquainted with the device and to become productive
faster. This manual is divided into the following sections:
• Section I: The Basics - provides Trilithic contact information, describes how this
operation manual is structured, and gives an overview of the instrument and its basic
features. Before using the instrument, it is recommended that the user read this section for
an overview of features, setup, basic commands and other important details. There is also
a section on how to store measurement data.
• Section II: Installer Functions - is full of instructions on how to use the features shown in
the Installer Menu of the instrument. This section is written as though the user is familiar
with the basic operation of the instrument and is broken into chapters for each function.
• Section III: Service Functions - is full of instructions on how to use the features shown in
the Service Menu of the instrument. This section is written as though the user is familiar
with the basic operation of the instrument and is broken into chapters for each function.
• Section IV: Setup Functions - is full of instructions on how to use the features shown in
the Setup Menu of the instrument. This section is written as though the user is familiar with
the basic operation of the instrument and is broken into chapters for each function.
• Section V: Utility Functions - is full of instructions on how to use the features shown in
the Utility Menu of the instrument. This section is written as though the user is familiar with
the basic operation of the instrument and is broken into chapters for each function.
• Section VI: Appendix - provides instrument specifications and warranty information.
1.3
Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual has several standard conventions for presenting information.
• Connections, Menus, menu options, and user entered text and commands appear in bold.
• Section names, Web and email addresses appear in italics.
Note: A note is information that will be of assistance to you related to the

current step or procedure.
CAUTION: A caution alerts you to any condition that could cause a

mechanical failure or potential loss of data.
WARNING: A warning alerts you to any condition that could cause

personal injury.
Precautions
WARNING: The battery MUST be charged with the Trilithic charge cube
(15 V at 2 A) provided with the instrument. Using any other charge cube
may damage the battery.
WARNING: The maximum “RF” input voltage to the meter is 90 V

(AC or DC). A larger voltage will damage the meter.
CAUTION: The accuracy of the meter may be affected when in a strong

electromagnetic field.
CAUTION: Do not use the instrument in any manner not recommended

by the manufacturer.
1.4
Recommended Software and Hardware
The following software is recommended for advanced configuration and data management of the
860 DSP or 860 DSPi:
• WorkBench is a Windows-based web-linked software application that supports and
augments the many functions and features of the instrument, making it easier to update/
upgrade your instrument, using an intuitive PC graphic user interface. WorkBench is
especially helpful for keeping track of a fleet of devices, to make sure all technicians are
working with the same features, channel plans and test processes. With WorkBench, you
can quickly and easily install and configure additional optional performance features by
purchasing them, downloading them from the Trilithic website, and installing them at your
convenience.
• Simplifies device inventory management.
• Stores measurement results.
• Makes firmware updates easier, resulting in improved accuracy and productivity.
• Enables configuration of devices including channel plans and automated tests
ensuring consistency in measurement procedures.
• Optional TDM component in WorkBench provides communication link with
instruments in the field.
• Test Data Management Integrated Server Package is a pre-configured server,
integrating powerful software applications and hardware to provide a tailored,
comprehensive solution for managing test data and field analyzer inventory. It comes
equipped with TDM (Trilithic Data Manager) server software and one onboard WorkBench
application. The Trilithic TDM is a server application that enables remote configuration of
the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, collection of measurement records, and instrument update and
feature addition via Internet.
• Enables in-field device configuration updates.
• Upload or download measurement data for records.
• “One-click” send and receive data.
• Interfaces with records, work order management, and third party diagnostic
information; facilitates inventory, work order completion tracking, etc.
• Messaging interface for broadcast or individual technician communication.
• All server software is pre-installed on a high performance server, ensuring reliability
and minimizing system activation time.
1.5
• The Trilithic Data Manager (TDM) makes keeping field meter firmware up to date simple
by notifying the technician that an update is available when he/she enters the Browser
mode. Automated tests can be programmed and deployed to meters in the same way, to
ensure consistent testing and comparable results. The Trilithic TDM interfaces with
Trilithic’s WorkBench application, which keeps measurement data for historical records,
accessible from the NOC, and tied to a work order. It also interfaces with third-party work
order management applications.
1.6
2. Introduction 2

Overview
Congratulations! You’re the owner of Trilithic’s 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, a multifunction, interactive
cable analyzer. Specifically designed for the digital age, the instrument performs a wide range of
network and analog / digital signal quality tests and can also serve as a data terminal for work
orders and other documentation.
Two versions of the instrument are offered, the 860
DSPi, modem-equipped and configured for digital
installations; and the 860 DSP itself, without a
modem and offering the feature set and
performance needed for distribution and headend
maintenance.
Easily tailored to meet changing needs and
applications, the instrument can be re-configured
through options as an advanced analog signal
analyzer, a QAM / QPSK digital signal analyzer,
high-resolution spectrum analyzer, modem tester or
data terminal communicating by DOCSIS and
other interface protocols.
With return path options the instrument can perform
all of the functions of Trilithic’s RSVP and 9580
SSR return test field units and is fully compatible
with Trilithic’s Guardian Reverse Path Maintenance
System. Options also allow the instrument to be
converted into a modem-equipped 860 DSP with all of the features of both instruments.
860 DSP and 860 DSPi Base Models

Trilithic offers the following base 860 DSP and DSPi configurations:
• 860 DSP (P/N 201097001F)
• 860 DSPi with US DOCSIS 2.0 Modem (P/N 201097100U)
• 860 DSPi with Euro DOCSIS 2.0 Modem (P/N 201097110U)
• 860 DSPi with US DOCSIS 3.0 Modem (P/N 2011097200U)
• 860 DSPi with Euro DOCSIS 3.0 Modem (P/N 201097210U)
1.7
Features
Adaptability
DSP-based, the instrument can easily be enhanced by downloading software options and
features from the Trilithic website, www.trilithic.com. Many of the firmware updates are free, and
most do not require hardware changes.
Durability and Convenience

The instrument is housed in a durable shock-resistant plastic housing, which is further
protected by an integral rubber boot and enclosed in a padded bag. A hand strap and a rubber
nonslip grip allow the operator to hold the instrument securely with one hand in all weather
conditions. A shoulder strap allows you to carry the instrument hands-free.
WARNING: Never use a shoulder strap while climbing or working where

the strap could catch on something in a fall.
User Friendly
The operator interface of the instrument is based on familiar PC-like conventions, with displays
and controls presented as desktops, icons, drop down menus and soft keys. Often-used test
sequences can be assembled into “Macros”, sequences of several different tests that can then
be executed at the push of a button or at specified times or intervals.
Note: See Section II: Installer Functions, Chapter 13: Auto Test
Mode to learn how to setup an Auto Test Macro.
Standard Functions
Your instrument is equipped with a number of standard functions and may also be equipped
with one or more optional functions. All 860 DSPi’s tune to the 4 - 65 MHz reverse frequency
spectrum. Other advanced features include measurement of hum, carrier/noise ratios on
active channels and CSO/CTB. All 860 DSPi’s are equipped to store measurement data
records which can be accessed at a later time.
1.8
WorkBench Software
WorkBench is the Windows-based companion software for your instrument. This software
manages all the support aspects of your instrument including configuration, data transfer, and
installation of updates and options.
Configuration
WorkBench allows you to choose and edit channel plans and configuration packages, set
signal and noise measurement bandwidths, select measurement units, define various
parameters and set performance limits for auto test functions. This software also allows you to
customize your instrument to meet your specific needs and preferences.
Data File Transfer

Your instrument can capture and store various data including performance to user set limits,
which can later be transferred to a PC running WorkBench. Types of data stored include
analog signal amplitudes, digital signal powers, carrier/noise ratios, BER and other measures
of digital performance, and key return path measurements. In addition to simple records, the
instrument can assemble and store comprehensive reports of signal quality which can later be
transferred to WorkBench for review. The results of running Auto Test macros are automatically
stored.
Updates and Adding Options

WorkBench software gives you a powerful tool for keeping your instruments up to date. New
capabilities and options can be added to your instrument in the field by simply downloading
firmware. WorkBench manages this process, by acquiring new firmware from disk or directly
from the Trilithic website, evaluating your instrument and advising you if updates are absent.
1.9
3. Getting to Know Your 860 DSPi 3
Overview
Before using your instrument take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the instrument, its
basic conventions and its navigational tools. This section provides a brief overview of the
instrument’s features, buttons, and controls.
Front Panel:
1. Outer Case 1 2 10 11 12
2. Display Screen
3. Textured Hand Grip and Strap
4. Yellow Softkeys
5. Alphanumeric Keypad
6. Arrow Buttons 3 16
7. Audio Speaker 17
8. Red Operation Buttons
9. Power Button 4 13
14
Top: 5
10. Connector for Future Expansion 6
7
11. SLM/Forward RF Connector
15
12. Reverse/Both RF Connector
Right Side:
9 8
13. Charge Jack
14. PC Cable Connector
15. Battery Access
16. USB Port (Not functional, but does supply voltage to power an accessory)
17. Ethernet Connection (Optional)
1.10
Battery Charging
Before you can use your instrument, you will need charge its battery. Your instrument’s battery
pack provides approximately 4 hours of power during continuous operation. (The 860 DSPi is
also equipped with an extra battery used with the internal cable modem, typically extending the
battery life to six hours of continuous operation.)
The instrument comes with a charge cube which
can be used to charge the battery in
approximately 4 hours or to trickle charge the
battery while the instrument is in use.
Plug the charge cube into the instrument’s
charge jack on the right side of the instrument.
The charge jack and the PC cable connector are
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
located under a dual rubber flap. Pull the flap
back. The charge jack is the top hole.
Your instrument is equipped with a “smart”
battery charging circuit so that the charging
method (fast or trickle) is an auto function. Fast
Charge is used to charge the battery quickly
when the unit is off. Trickle Charge is used when
the instrument is turned on.
Every time your instrument is plugged into the charging cube, it starts charging automatically via
the Trickle Charge method. If the unit determines Fast Charge is necessary, it defaults to the Fast
Charge method when the instrument is off.
Replacing the Battery

Charge Jack
The battery in your instrument has been installed at the
factory. Should you need to replace it, rotate the PC Cable Connector
Battery Access Latch (located below the PC cable

connector) counter clockwise to open it.
Battery Access Latch
The 860 DSPi is also equipped with an internal (turn COUNTER clockwise
battery used with the internal cable modem. For to open)
instructions on replacing this battery or for
replacement batteries call Trilithic.
CAUTION: Be sure your instrument is turned OFF before removing the

battery access latch.
1.11
The Display Screen
The instrument has been designed with simple, intuitive navigational tools. For your convenience,
the display has a large, easy to read, menu style navigation. In some menus you will also notice
on-screen cursors which enhance functions.
Once the instrument’s battery is charged, you may turn the instrument on by pressing the button
at the bottom left of the keypad.
The instrument will briefly display the introduction screen before displaying the Installer Menu.
Note: The introduction screen may be customized to include the user

name and company’s name. See Section IV: Setup Functions,
Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Global Settings to learn how to
customize your introduction screen.
The display screen contains several tools which you should become familiar with before using the
instrument. Take a moment to locate the basic features of the display screen.
Title Bar
The title bar along the top of the screen indicates which screen is displayed, such as the
Navigation Menu shown above.
1.12
Status Bar
Directly below the title bar is a gray status bar which displays the date, the battery voltage, the
battery charging status, the temperature, the communications status and the time. Possible
communications status indicators are IP, TCP, COM, RDY AND -----.
Note: When the battery is fully charged, the status bar will display
approximately 7.95 V. When the battery is low, the status bar will display
approximately 6.50 V.
Main Display Area

The main display area, located below the status bar, displays text and graphic information
such as selection icons, graphs, and interactive pop-up boxes which vary depending on which
screen has been accessed.
Note: A navigation menu (as shown above) is always displayed when the
instrument is first turned on. By default, the instrument displays the
Installer Menu with the Level icon highlighted. The instrument will
automatically display the navigation menu and icon that was last used
prior to the instrument being turned off.
Message Bar
Below the main display area is a black message bar. Single line text entries are displayed to
help you navigate the 860 DSPi menus and show information when the instrument is
performing tests. In some cases, the message bar will be split to show the status of your
instrument, such as DSP OK, LOW SIGNAL, WAITING and other status messages.
1.13
Softkey Labels
Below the message bar, are four softkeys which correspond to and identify the actions
assigned to the four yellow buttons on the keypad.
The softkeys are used to toggle between different menus as well as access various functions
within a menu screen.
Most menu screens utilize from one to four of the
softkeys which can be used for taking readings,
adjusting parameters and other operations.
For example: Installer, Service, Setup, Utility, etc.
Input/Output Helper Icons

Several of the function screens on the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi include input helper icons.
These icons are displayed to help you determine which RF port to connect the cable to use
when using the instrument. The two RF ports are described as follows:
SLM/Forward Port
This port is used when the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi will receive
data from the cable system.
Reverse/Both Port
This port is used to transmit data from the 860 DSP or 860
DSPi to the cable system.
Note: When the active network port has been changed to Internal
Modem, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi will transmit and receive data
through the SLM/Forward (input) port.
1.14
4. Basic Navigation 4

Introduction
The instrument is very flexible and easy to use. Using a combination of icons, menus and tabs you
can navigate through a variety of modes and functions. It is important that you take a moment to
become familiar with the basic navigational style and conventions of the instrument, so you can be
more efficient using your new instrument.
This section will provide you with a brief overview of the simple navigational style and some of the
common operating conventions of the instrument using:
• Alphanumeric Keypad
• Menu Icons
• Navigation Screens
• Arrow Buttons
• Red Operation Buttons
• Yellow Softkeys
Note: For more detailed and specific instructions on setup or specific

operating modes, refer to Sections II, III, IV, and V of this manual.
Let’s Get Started!

Turn the instrument power on by pressing the button
at the bottom left of the keypad.
If your instrument is not charged you can connect it to AC
power via its charge cube.
The instrument will briefly display the introduction screen
before displaying the Installer Menu.
Note: The introduction screen may be customized to include the user

name and company’s name. See Section IV: Setup Functions,
Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Global Settings to learn how to
customize your introduction screen.
1.15
Selecting Menu Icons
The first time you power on your instrument, it will default
to the Installer Menu. This first screen, displays a variety
of icons which are labeled with a corresponding number
and the operation they perform. This is your home page
or “desktop” for the instrument and will be your starting
point. Notice that the currently selected icon is
highlighted black and the other icons remain gray.
Note: The labels and the arrangement of the icons in these examples
are the default settings of the instrument. The display’s appearance
may be customized and therefore may differ from your instrument’s
display. This can be done using your WorkBench software. See the
WorkBench operation manual for more details.
Note: Icons are added to the instrument using WorkBench or during the
installation of some new firmware packages.
There are two ways to select an operation from the menu; by using arrow buttons or by entering
the corresponding two digit number using the alphanumeric keypad.
Arrow Buttons
To select an icon simply press the button(s) in the direction toward the icon you
wish to select. With the desired icon highlighted in black, press the button.
Alphanumeric Keyboard
To select an icon using the corresponding number, simply press the two digit numbers on the
alphanumeric keyboard, , for example for the Level icon. Icons 1 through 9 may also be
selected by pressing one number button and the button.
1.16
Using Softkeys
Most of the screens in the instrument utilize softkeys to access various modes, menus and
functions. These softkeys are accessed simply using the corresponding yellow buttons located on
the keypad directly below the display.
The Navigation Menus for example, utilize all four
softkeys.
Each softkey supports a different Navigation Menu:
• Installer
• Service
• Setup
• Utility
Note: The functions on these softkey labels may vary depending on the
instrument’s current operating mode.
The Installer Menu displays the installer functions available with the instrument. All of the installer
functions in this folder can be accessed using your arrow keys or by pressing the corresponding
two digit number as you learned previously.
As well, if you select the Service, Setup, or Utility Menus using the corresponding softkey, the
menu of choice will display the various functions available on your unit.
On some screens the softkeys are also used to access additional menus, additional information
(such as channel plans) or quick access to other functions (using the Goto softkey).
Note: The labels and the arrangement of the softkeys in these

examples are the default settings of the instrument. The display’s
appearance may be customized and therefore may differ from your
instrument’s display. This can be done using your WorkBench
software. See the WorkBench operation manual for more details.
1.17
Using Red Operation Buttons
The instrument has three red operation buttons on its keypad, which are used for navigation
through various screens and functions. Those three buttons are the , , and buttons.
Enter Button
The button is used for a few different things. It is used to confirm selection of a highlighted
item, such as an option or icon in a menu; when on an operation screen it can be used to open
a pop-up entry window for a specific parameter; and it is used to accept entered information
and to close an entry window.
Back Button
The button is used to take you back to a previous screen or to close a menu. It can also be
used to exit a pop-up entry window without accepting entry information.
Note: If you hold down the button, it will cause the instrument to go
back multiple screens.
Function Button
The button can be selected at any time to display a pop-up menu with additional functions.
These functions vary from capturing screens for future reference to saving configuration files.
The Function Menu also contains an item called “Context Help”, which will display a brief
explanation of the current screen.
Note: If the instrument “locks up” or does not respond to user

commands, reset the instrument by pressing and holding the and
buttons for five seconds.
1.18
Using the Alphanumeric Keypad
The instrument makes use of an alphanumeric keypad similar to that of a telephone for entering
both numbers and letters.
You can enter a name using the alphanumeric buttons on the keypad
by pressing a button several times to cycle through its associated
number and letters.
For instance, the button supports the number 1 and the letters A,
B, and C. The button supports the number 2 and the letters D, E
and F.
Two buttons are used for additional items. The button which
supports the number 0, is also used to put a “space” between other
letters or numbers and the button can be used as a period or
decimal.
In some instances you will also need to utilize the button to advance the cursor to the next
space.
Note: The easiest way to learn how the alphanumeric buttons work is to
use them. See Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
Setup Mode, Global Settings to learn how to enter your operator name
and company name using the alphanumeric buttons.
1.19
5. Initial Setup 5

Once you have become familiar with the basic operation of the instrument, you are ready to begin
using your instrument. Although the instrument is delivered from the factory ready-to-use, you will
want to setup a few preliminary parameters to get started using the instrument effectively.
For this reason it is recommended that you setup your instrument’s channel plan, including any
digital channels you may have on your cable system. And if you have an 860 DSPi, you will want
to setup your internal cable modem and network connection. Refer to the following areas of this
Operation Manual for more information on how to:
• Learn a Channel Plan - Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode,
Edit Channel Plan Settings
• Edit a Channel Plan - Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode,
• Configure a Cable Modem and Network Connection - Section IV: Setup Functions,
Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, COM/NET Settings
• Configure a Wi-Fi Connection - Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
Setup Mode, Wi-Fi Settings
Note: See the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi quick start guide that was
delivered with the instrument for more information about how to perform
the preliminary setup of the instrument.
1.20
6. Basic Function Menu Options 6

Introduction
The Function Menu can be accessed by pressing the button while in any of the Navigation
Menus or from within many of the instrument’s modes.
This chapter will provide you with an understanding of the most common Function Menu options:
• Contrast / Freeze
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Switch to Modem, RJ45 Port, or Wi-Fi
Contrast / Freeze
This option is used to adjust the contrast level of the display screen or to freeze the display so you
can study the display in detail before resuming the measurement.
Note: This option cannot be accessed from within the Auto Test
Results, Calendar, Calculator, and CM Thru Modes.
To use this option, press the button, use the

buttons to highlight Contrast / Freeze, and then
press the button. You may also select Contrast /
Freeze by pressing the corresponding alphanumeric
button.
• The Function Menu will close, the title bar will
indicate System Paused, and the display will
freeze.
• To adjust the contrast level of the display screen,
press the buttons.
• To resume measurement, press any button on
the instrument.
Note: Upon start-up, the display screen may be very dark or light based
on extreme environmental temperatures. Use this function to adjust the
contrast level in order to correct the problem.
1.21
Screen Capture
This option is used to save an exact image of your measurements including all of the optional
settings such as markers. This option will save the current screen as a compressed bitmap image
file.
Screen captures can be downloaded from the 860 DSPi to WorkBench for later review.
WorkBench also allows you to output a screen capture as a .bmp file for inserting it into a word
processing document or slide presentation. For more information on downloading files to
WorkBench, see the WorkBench operation manual.

buttons to highlight Screen Capture, and then
press the button. You may also select Screen
Capture by pressing the corresponding alphanumeric
button.
• The Function Menu will close, the Capture
Screen Image Window will open.
• Enter the file name of the screen capture using
the alphanumeric keypad.
• Once the file name has been entered, press the
button. The file is now saved for retrieval using
WorkBench.
Note: Files may be stored in .bmp, .lcd, or .bmpz format. The .bmpz
format is the most memory efficient format. See Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Measurement Settings
for more information about how to change the file format.
1.22
Context Help
This option is used to provide mode specific help and advice.

buttons to highlight Context Help, and then press
the button. You may also select Context Help by
pressing the corresponding alphanumeric button.
• The Function Menu will close and the Help
Window will open.
• When done reading the help file, press the

button to return to the previous screen.
1.23
Save Data Log
This option is used to store measurement data so that you can download it later using
WorkBench.
You can download a data log to WorkBench where you have several options for viewing and
comparing data. WorkBench also lets you output a data log in text delimited format for importing
into a spreadsheet. For more information on downloading files to WorkBench, see the
WorkBench operation manual.

buttons to highlight Save Data Log, and then
press the button. You may also select Save Data
Log by pressing the corresponding alphanumeric
button. The Function Menu will close and the Save
Data Log Window will open.
Note: The Location and Task Files fields will not appear if they have
not been enabled. See Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2:
Instrument Setup Mode, Measurement Settings for more information
about how to enable these fields.
1.24
Location
To enter the location, use the buttons to
highlight Location field, then use the buttons to
change between None and Custom, and then press
the button. With Custom selected, press the
button and the Edit Location Window will open. Use
the buttons and the alphanumeric
keypad to enter your location information, and then
press the button. The Edit Location Window will
close.
Task
To associate the data log with a work order, use the
buttons to highlight the Task field, and use the
buttons to select the name of the task file.
1.25
File Name
To select a file name, use the buttons to
highlight File Name field. Either use the name that is
automatically created when you have associated a
task file or enter the file name of the data log using
the alphanumeric keypad.
Once the file name has been entered, press the

button. The file is now saved for retrieval using
WorkBench.
Select Network Port

This option allows you to quickly toggle the method of external communication.
Note: This option can only be accessed from within the Installer,
Service, Setup, and Utility Menus.

buttons to highlight Change Network Port, and
then press the button. You may also select Change
Network Port by pressing the corresponding
alphanumeric button. The Change Network Port
window will open.
1.26
Use the buttons to highlight the External
RJ45, Internal Modem, or Wi-Fi network port, and
then press the button.
1.27
7. Remote Control Mode 7

Introduction
In Remote Control Mode the instrument has the ability to be controlled remotely over an internet
connection. This is extremely useful for remotely controlling an instrument in the field from the
office. In order to use the Remote Control Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be
equipped with Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5). Remote Control Mode is
standard on the 860 DSPi.
This section will provide you with a basic understanding
of how to use Remote Control Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Logging on to the Network
• Remote Control Mode Operation
Note: If your instrument does not include all of the features shown in this
chapter, be sure to go on-line to www.trilithic.com to update your firmware
for free. This will allow you to upgrade your instrument to use all of the
newest free features that are included in this mode.
Required Setup
To use Remote Control Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have
completed Chapter 5: Initial Setup before proceeding through this chapter.
To use Remote Control Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal
cable modem. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
Setup Mode, CM/CPE Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
To use Wi-Fi Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
Chapter 5: Initial Setup before proceeding through this chapter.
To use Wi-Fi Mode with the internal Wi-Fi adapter, you will need to set up the internal Wi-Fi
adapter. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
Setup Mode, Wi-Fi Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
1.28
Logging on to the Network
Verify in the status bar, that the field to the left of the time says RDY. This indicates that the
instrument is ready to connect to a network.
Before logging on to the network, the 860 DSPi’s communication port must be selected. From
the Installer, Service, Setup, or Utility menus, press the button to display the Function
Menu. Use the buttons to highlight Change Network Port, and then press the button.
The Change Network Port window will open. Use the buttons to highlight the desired
communication port, then press the button.
Note: If the instrument does not indicate RDY within 10 seconds (30
seconds if SSL is installed) after the instrument is turned on, power the
unit off and back on. If the RDY message never shows up, you may not
have Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5) installed on your
instrument.
Note: The internal cable modem uses the measurement “F” connector.
So, only network type tests (i.e. Ping, Thru Put, VoIP, Web Browser,
etc.) are available. If regular measurement modes are required, use the
external RJ45 as your remote control network port.
Internal Cable Modem

Connect the cable drop to the instrument’s
SLM/Forward input, then select the icon from
PING
the Installer Menu. The Logging On To Network

Window will show the progress of the logon process.
When logon is complete, the Ping Mode will be
displayed. Take note of the Our IP =
###.###.###.### Field that is listed in the title bar.
This represents the IP address that you will connect
to using a PC’s web browser.
Note: If you have not set the default downstream data carrier frequency
or it is incorrect it may take several minutes for the modem to find the
downstream data carrier.
1.29
External RJ45 Port
Connect the external network connection to the
instrument’s Ethernet port, then select the icon
from the Installer Menu.
The Logging On To Network Window will show the
progress of the logon process.
Wi-Fi
Select the icon from the Installer Menu.
The Logging On To Network window will show the

1.30
Remote Control Mode Operation
To remotely control the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi from
a PC, open the PC’s web browser and enter the IP
address that was assigned to your instrument when
you logged on to the network.
The image to the right will be displayed in the web
browser. Use any of the buttons on the image
(except the button) to control the instrument as
you normally would.
If you need to refresh the web browser image of the
instrument without pressing a key, click directly on
the image in the instrument’s display screen.
Note: We recommend that your instrument is connected to AC power

when in Remote Control Mode.
A smaller control is provided as an alternative to the

default display of the full instrument. Select the Open
Small 860 DSP Control button. This will open a new
window as displayed to the right. Use this control just as
you would the larger control.
When you have finished using the small control, simply
close the window.
Note: The Remote Control Mode has been tested to work with the
latest versions of the Internet Explorer and Firefox web browsers. This
feature may not work with some other web browsers.
1.31
8. 860 DSPi RTP Reflector Option 8
Overview
In addition to the standard VoIP RTP test functionality of the 860 DSPi, Trilithic offers exclusive
compatibility with the Tektronix® DirectQuality™ system. A hand-held probe (PP-30) us used in
installation testing to relay call quality information back to a DirectQuality server for display on the
installer’s 860 DSPi browser.
Additionally, an RTP reflector option configures the 860 DSPi to reflect an RTP stream generated
by a Tektronix probe, enabling analysis of upstream and downstream call characteristics.
The 860 DSPi RTP Reflector Option extends the measurement and troubleshooting range of field
technicians by offering a simple round-trip VoIP quality test from any RF test point. The option
works through communication with the Tektronix DirectQuality active monitoring system, enabling
tests to verify RTP communication from the test point to probes placed strategically throughout the
cable network.
Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used to transmit IPTV, Video-on-Demand (VoD), VoIP and
other real-time media over IP networks. Tektronix’ RTP Loopback test agent accurately simulates
these media streams by supporting over 50 different audio and video codecs, including the latest
wideband VoIP, HDTV and IPTV standards.
The RTP Reflector Option enables round-trip stream analysis for packet loss, jitter, delay and
other IP impairments. R-factor, MOS and other industry-standard service quality metrics are
included based on a Tektronix E-model implementation.
The Tektronix DirectQuality server provides a PocketDQ 2.0 application that enables browser
based activation of a wide range of tests to verify IP communication characteristics.
PP-30 Test Probe

The PP-30 is a small test probe that attaches to a telephone outlet for call and connection
quality testing within the Tektronix system. The 860 DSPi can be configured to communicate
with the system to initiate tests and display results.
1.32
860 DSPi Web Browser Configuration
The links on the 860 DSPi browser home page can be
configured using WorkBench.
The following procedure shows how to configure a link

for “PocketDQ” or “RTP Reflector” on the 860 DSPi. The
graphic shown to the right is the 860 DSPi
Configuration Window within WorkBench that is used
to set web browser parameters.
To configure a link for “RTP Reflector”, perform the following steps:

1. Select the “Modify web browser parameters as defined below” radio button.
2. Choose the link title number that you wish to change, for example, “Link 3 Title” and enter
“RTP Reflector”.
3. Choose the “Link 3 Address,” and change the URL to: http://[IP_address]/tektronix/cgi-bin/
pocketdq.exe.
Note: For [IP_address] enter either the IP address of the DQ server, or

the name of the server, e.g. dq.trilithic.com, etc.
1.33
Accessing the PocketDQ Application
After you have configured the 860 DSPi web
browser using WorkBench, enter the 860 DSPi
Web Browser Mode and select the RTP Reflector
link. The PocketDQ login screen will be displayed.
Upon successful login, the following screen is

displayed. This screen enables you to run a test,
view previous test results, or retrieve support
information.
Test Procedure
When the user selects Test from the PocketDQ
screen, the test will start with an Initiation screen.
First the user selects test objective, test origin (call
from), and service area. Next the user enters IP
address or host name for termination device. The IP
address is set automatically when using a Trilithic
860 DSPi. The test duration can be set within a
range of 1 to 10 minutes. The codec used is
configured in the DirectQuality server default
settings.
1.34
Searching for Previously Run Tests
Tests that have been run previously can be found by “searching” and users can use any
combination of parameters to search for test results. The search mode entry display example is
shown below.
Search results are grouped by date, as seen in the above results display. The “State” column
provides overall Pass or Fail information. The “Phone/IP” column displays the phone number or IP
address of termination.
1.35
The RTP Reflector top-level results display shows two results families: Speech Quality and RTP
Statistics. Drilling down by selecting the pass/fail parameter provides the following information.
The Speech Quality results include CQ (conversational quality) and LQ (listening quality) MOS and
R-factor.
The RTP Statistics results include 5 additional results families, each with pass/fail limits. Each of
these categories provides additional information accessible by selecting the pass/fail parameter
link.
1.36
Packet Information
Each of the Packets results provides further detail when the user selects a particular pass/fail
parameter link, as follows:
1.37
Burst Information
Each of the Burst results provides further detail when the user selects a particular pass/fail
parameter link, as follows:
1.38
RTP Statistics Information
More detail for Jitter is provided when the user selects that pass/fail parameter link, as follows:
More detail for the Jitter Buffer is provided when the user selects that pass/fail parameter link, as
follows:
More detail for the Delay is provided when the user selects that pass/fail parameter link, as
follows:
Test Data Management

The RTP Reflector measurement information can be saved to a task (work order) folder for
inclusion in installation quality assurance test data. This is done by selecting the “save data” button
on the initial results display.
1.39
9. Secure860Link 9
Introduction
The 860 DSPi has two standard features which enhance communication security, the
Secure860Link (S8L), and the Instrument Fingerprint. The S8L enhances privacy for
communications between the meter and the Trilithic Data Manager (TDM) system. The Instrument
Fingerprint system will be discussed in the next chapter.
SSL Certificate
The S8L feature in the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi uses a unique 1024 bit RSA certificate on every
860 in the cable system and utilizes Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption.
Note: The TDM must also have this feature installed for the
Secure860Link to work.
Upon initial activation of the S8L Mode, the meter will (on the
next reboot) create a self signed SSL certificate identifying the
meter by its MAC address. This may take up to 5 minutes to
create but must be done only once. After this certificate is
created and its private key stored in the hidden flash memory, the
certificate will be loaded into the run-time memory for use by the
meter’s internal web server and internal web browser.
The meter operator (using the Web Browser Menu) logs into the
TDM using the secure web port 443 (https:// link) and causes the
TDM to establish a data connection back to the meter over port
443. The TDM then requests the meter’s SSL certificate and
compares it against authorized meters within its database. If the
meter is authorized, communication continues over port 443 until
the transactions are completed. If the meter is not approved in
the database, then communication is halted by the TDM.
Note: The TDM maintains a list of the connection attempts made by

unauthorized 860 meters. The TDM administrator may authorize or
de-authorize a meter at any time.
1.40
Using Secure860Link
The 860 DSPi can utilize S8L using a combination of its
web browser over SSL as well as its web server over
SSL. Both (browse and serve) directions use secure
TCP port 443 as a communication path. The only
unsecure connections allowed within the meter are a few
identification commands. No unsecure data can be read
or written to any of the flash devices in the meter while in
S8L Mode. Additionally, the Remote Control Mode will
not allow anyone to view the LCD remotely, thus
prohibiting the ability to issue commands remotely. A
sample image is shown here of what the viewer sees in
Remote Control view while in S8L Mode.
Secure860Link Support
Perform the following steps to confirm the availability of
S8L on the instrument:
1. Select the Setup softkey.
2. Select the i icon.

Info
3. Highlight the Version Info Menu selection.

4. Check the characters at the end of the entry next
to the text Package.
Firmware ending in “.2” indicates that SSL is
supported and if your firmware is at least version
8.4.1.2 or higher, your meter supports S8L.
Enable/Disable S8L
S8L can be enabled or disabled via WorkBench or the Setup/Global Menu in the meter.
1.41
10. Instrument Fingerprint 10
Introduction
The 860 DSPi Instrument Fingerprint feature, in addition to keeping the serial number in a secure
internal code, also enables the owner to “imprint” the meter with an “asset id” that identifies the
original owner in the event that the analyzer is lost or stolen. A six digit serial number is entered at
the factory, and in addition to being unchangeable, is displayed when the instrument is powered
on.
Instrument Fingerprint Serial Number

Perform the following steps to view the instrument serial
number:

Info
3. Select the Unit ID button.

The serial number will be displayed. You may also press
the alphanumeric keypad digit to display the
instrument serial number.
4. Press the button or the button to exit the

Serial Number screen.
When the instrument is restarted, the splash screen will
show the serial number in the upper left corner.
1.42
Entering the Instrument Fingerprint Serial Number
The user will be required to manually enter the serial number if the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
instrument is updated from an old firmware version.
Note: The serial number can only be entered ONCE. Take caution to
make sure it is correctly entered before final confirmation is performed.
Perform the following steps to enter the instrument serial

number:

Info
3. Select the Unit ID button. You may also press the

alphanumeric keypad digit to display the
instrument serial number.
The Enter Serial Number screen will be displayed.
4. Locate the serial number tag on the back of the
instrument and use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the unit serial number.
5. Press the button or the button to exit the

Enter Serial Number screen.

show the serial number in the upper left hand corner.
1.43
Asset ID
The 860 DSPi can be identified with a unique asset ID
tag. This is especially useful in electronically labeling the
860 DSPi as the property of an individual or a company.
show the asset ID in the lower left corner.
Entering the Asset ID

The user will be required to manually enter the asset ID. Trilithic’s WorkBench software must be
used to assign the asset ID to the 860 DSPi.
Perform the following steps to enter the asset ID:
1. Start the WorkBench software and connect to the 860 DSPi via a network connection.
2. On the Global tab, click Application
Options to expand the menu tree,
then select General.
3. The asset ID tag is a global setting,
and will be applied to all 860 DSPi’s
which are configured by that copy of
WorkBench.
4. Enter the asset ID password to
prevent a user with a different copy
of WorkBench from changing the
asset ID tag.
When the instrument is restarted, the splash
screen will show the asset ID in the lower
left corner.
Note: For additional configuration information, refer to the WorkBench

software manual.
1.44
11. Firmware Upgrade Instructions 11

Overview
This chapter discusses how to upgrade the firmware of the 860 DSPi. There are four ways to
upgrade the 860 DSPi:
• Serial connection - Use a serial cable to directly connect a PC to the 860 DSPi.
• Ethernet connection - Use a router that is configured as a DHCP server. You must first be
sure that the router you are using is setup to assign IP addresses using DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol).
• Crossover cable connection - Use a crossover cable to directly connect a PC and the 860
DSPi that are both assigned a static IP address within the same range.
• TDM connection via internal cable modem (refer to the TDM operation manual).
Serial Connection
Prerequisites
The following tasks must be completed before performing the firmware upgrade:
• Connect the 860 DSPi to the PC using the 860 DSPi serial cable.
• Connect the 860 DSPi to the charge cube and plug the charge cube into AC power.
• You must have WorkBench software.
Upgrade Firmware
Perform the following steps using WorkBench:
1. Under the Online tab select the “Updates and Upgrades” link, and then select the
“Click here to download 860 DSP or 860 DSPi firmware” link. This will download the
firmware upgrade (.860) file.
2. Under the Devices tab, right-
click 860 DSP, and then
select “New 860 DSP
Connection…”.
3. Select the “Connect to a
device on a local serial port”
radio button and select the
serial port that the 860 DSPi
is connected to.
1.45
4. Select the Connect… button.
5. Right-click on the device, then hover
over the “Configure” menu, and then
select “Apply Firmware
Upgrade…”.
6. Select the firmware upgrade (.860)
file that was saved in Step 1, and
then select the Open button.
Ethernet Connection
Using a Router
Prerequisites
• Connect the 860 DSPi to the router using a Cat5e Ethernet cable.
• Connect a PC to the router.
1.46
Configure the PC to Obtain an IP Address Automatically
1. Select the Start button, then right-click My

Network Places and then select
“Properties”.
2. Right-click Local Area Connection and
then select “Properties”.
3. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”, and then
select the Properties button.
4. Select the “Obtain an IP address

automatically” radio button.
5. Select the OK button to save the
configuration changes.
1.47
Configure the 860 DSPi for DHCP Using the External RJ45 Port
Setup
1. Select the softkey.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the “COM/NET” option.
4. Use the buttons to highlight the

Network Port field.
5. Use the buttons to select

“External RJ45”.
6. Use the buttons to highlight the My
IP Address field.
The My IP Address field will default to “DHCP
(Dynamic)”.
7. If “DHCP (Dynamic)” is not selected, use
the alphanumeric keypad to enter “0.0.0.0” in the My IP Address field, then select
the button.
1.48
8. Select the INSTALLER softkey.
9. Select the icon to activate the RJ45

port and obtain an IP address from the
router.
The IP address is displayed in the upper left
corner of the top banner.
1.49
Upgrade Firmware
Not Using Workbench
1. Download the 860 DSPi firmware upgrade zip file from the Trilithic website.
2. Unzip the file and double-click the executable (.exe) firmware upgrade file.
3. When prompted, enter the IP address of the 860 DSPi and press the Enter button.
Using Workbench
1. Under the Online tab
select the “Updates and
Upgrades” link, and then
select the
“Click here to download
860 DSP or 860 DSPi
firmware” link. This will
download the firmware
upgrade (.860) file.
2. Under the Devices tab,
right-click 860 DSP, and
then select “New 860 DSP
Connection…”.
3. Select the “Connect to a device
on the network” radio button and
enter the IP address of the 860
DSPi.
5. Right-click on the device, then
hover over the “Configure”
menu, and then select “Apply
Firmware Upgrade…”.
6. Select the firmware upgrade
(.860) file that was saved in step
1, and then select the Open
button.
1.50
Cross-Over Cable Connection
To use a crossover cable you will need to assign a static IP address within the same range to both
the PC and the 860 DSPi. For the purpose of this instruction we will be using the IP address
10.10.10.1 and Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0.
Prerequisites
• Connect the 860 DSPi to the PC using a Cat5e crossover cable.
Configure the PC to Use a Static IP

Address
1. Select the “Start” button, then right-click “My
Network Places” and then select “Properties”.
2. Right-click “Local Area Connection” and then
select “Properties”.
3. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”, and then
select the Properties button.
1.51
4. Select the “Use the following IP
address:” radio button and enter the IP
address of 10.10.10.1 and the Subnet
Mask of 255.255.255.0.
5. Select the OK button to save the
configuration changes.
Configure the 860 DSPi for a Static IP Address Using the External
RJ45 Port
Setup
1. Select the softkey.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the “COM/NET” option.

4. Use the buttons to highlight the
Network Port field.
5. Use the buttons to select

“External RJ45”.
6. Use the ... alphanumeric keypad to
enter the IP Address of 10.10.10.2 in the My IP Address field.
7. Enter the Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet Mask field.
1.52
8. Select the INSTALLER softkey.
9. Select the icon to activate the RJ45

port and obtain an IP address from the
router.
The IP address is displayed in the upper left
corner of the top banner.
1.53
Upgrade Firmware
Not Using WorkBench
If you are not using WorkBench, perform the following steps:
1. Download the 860 DSPi firmware upgrade zip file from the Trilithic website.
2. Unzip the file and double-click the executable (.exe) firmware upgrade file.
3. When prompted, enter the IP address of the 860 DSPi and press the Enter button.
Using WorkBench
If you are using WorkBench,
perform the following steps:
1. Under the Online tab
select the “Updates and
Upgrades” link, and then
select the “Click here to
download 860 DSP or 860
DSPi firmware” link. This
will download the firmware
upgrade (.860) file.
2. Under the Devices tab, right-
click 860 DSP, and then select
“New 860 DSP Connection…”.
3. Select the “Connect to a device
on the network” radio button and
enter the IP address of the 860
DSPi.
5. Right-click on the device, then
hover over the “Configure”
menu, and then select “Apply
Firmware Upgrade…”.
6. Select the firmware upgrade
(.860) file that was saved in Step
1, and then select the Open
button.
1.54
12. Optional Software and Hardware 12
Optional Software Features
The following table describes the optional software features that are available for the 860 DSP
and 860 DSPi.
To determine which software options are installed on your 860 DSP or 860 DSPi do as follows:
1. Access the Setup Menu by pressing the Setup softkey.

Info
3. Once in the Instrument Information Mode, follow the instructions shown below for each
option.
Option
Name Description
Code
PP-1 Power Pack Option This option is installed in all 860 DSPs as a standard
(P/N 0930081003) feature. When this option is installed in the 860 DSPi it
provides the extended spectrum analyzer frequency range
of 4 MHz to 1.0 GHz as well as providing several
additional modes that are not included with the standard
860 DSPi.
Use the
buttons to highlight
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
will be indicated by
the text Power Pack
: YES.
1.55
Option
Name Description
Code
RTB Return Transmitter When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi this option
Board enables return signal generation. This hardware option is
(P/N 071271001K) required when selecting the Return Sweep Receiver
Option (SR-1), Return Tester RSVP Option (VP-1), or
Frequency Domain Reflectometer Option (FDR).
Use the
the
Communication
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Transmitter
(65 MHz) followed
by the calibration
information for the return transmitter board.
SR-1 Return Sweep When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi this option
Receiver Option provides the functionality of the 9580 SSR Field Unit. This
(P/N 0930082003) option is compatible with the Guardian System and
Guardian System II. It also includes the RSA Mode for
return band sweeping.
REQUIRES RETURN TRANSMITTER BOARD &
POWER PACK OPTION (PP-1) ON THE 860 DSPi
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Return Test
(SSR) : YES.
1.56
Option
Name Description
Code
VP-1 Return Tester When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi this option
Option provides the functionality of the RSVP and RSVP 2
(P/N 0930082004) Installer's Return Tester. This option is compatible with the
Guardian System and Guardian System II.
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Return
Install (RSVP) :
YES.
SA-1 Spectrum Analyzer When installed in an 860 DSPi this option upgrades
Option Spectrum Analyzer Mode to Advanced Spectrum Analyzer
(P/N 0930082005) Mode to provide zero span measurement capabilities as
well as adjustable Resolution Bandwidth (RBW).
REQUIRES POWER PACK OPTION (PP-1) ON THE
860 DSPi
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Advanced
Spectrum : YES.
1.57
Option
Name Description
Code
QA-1 QAM Option When installed in an 860 DSP this option provides all the
(P/N 0930082008) features that are included in QAM Lite Mode as well as the
following display options; constellation, equalizer tap
diagram, and BER graph. This option also provides QAM
EVS support.
Use the
the RF Option
Info field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text QAM
(4..256), QAM
EVS : YES.
Note: Units with
QAM Lite Mode installed will be indicated by the text QAM Lite.
QA-2 QAM Option When installed in an 860 DSP this option upgrades QAM
(P/N 0930081004) Lite Mode to QAM Mode to provide the following display
options; constellation, equalizer tap diagram, and BER
graph. This option also provides QAM EVS support.
REQUIRES POWER PACK OPTION (PP-1)
Use the
the RF Option
Info field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text QAM
(4..256), QAM
EVS : YES.
Note: Units with
QAM Lite Mode installed will be indicated by the text QAM
Lite.
1.58
ption
Name Description
Code
VSB Vestigial Sideband When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this option
Modulation (VSB) measures and displays the signal qualities of Vestigial
Option Sideband Modulation (VSB) digital television signals
(P/N 0930081012) displayed using constellation, equalizer tap diagram, and
BER graph. This feature also displays the signal level and
numeric values for MER and pre/post FEC BER.
NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSPi WITH EURO DOCSIS
MODEM
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text 8VSB
(ATSC) : YES.
FS-1 Forward When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this option
SpeedSweep provides compatibility with the 8300 FST for forward
Option sweep and balancing.
(P/N 0930081008) REQUIRES POWER PACK OPTION (PP-1) ON THE
860 DSPi
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text
SpeedSweep :
YES.
1.59
Option
Name Description
Code
VITS Vertical Interval Test When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this option
Signal Option analyzes the signal qualities of Vertical Test Signals (VITS)
(P/N 0930081013) to measure in-channel response, differential phase,
differential gain, and chroma delay. This feature also
displays the test signal itself.
NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSPi WITH EURO DOCSIS
MODEM
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text VITS :
YES.
TC-1 TraffiControl Option When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this option
(P/N 0930081014) provides a way to troubleshoot upstream ingress and
noise problems within active channel bands by seeing the
ingress that is present "underneath" an upstream cable
modem channel, or any bursty signal.
REQUIRES POWER PACK OPTION (PP-1) ON THE
860 DSPi
Use the
the RF Option Info
Field. If you have this
hardware option
installed it will be
indicated by the text
TraffiControl : YES.
1.60
Option
Name Description
Code
RTP-1 Real-Time When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this option
Transport Protocol extends the measurement and troubleshooting range of
Reflector Option field technicians by offering a simple round-trip VoIP
(P/N 0930081015) quality test from any RF test point. The option works
through communication with the Tektronix DirectQuality
active monitoring system, enabling tests to verify RTP
communication from the test point to probes placed
strategically throughout the cable network.
Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used to transmit
IPTV, Video-on-Demand (VoD), VoIP and other real-time
media over IP networks. Tektronix’ RTP Loopback test
agent accurately simulates these media streams by
supporting over 50 different audio and video codecs,
including the latest wideband VoIP, HDTV & IPTV
standards.
The RTP Reflector Option enables round-trip stream
analysis for packet loss, jitter, delay and other IP
impairments. R-factor, MOS and other industry-standard
service quality metrics are included based on a Tektronix
E-model implementation.
THIS OPTION ONLY WORKS WITH FULLY

IMPLEMENTED Tektronix DirectQuality SYSTEMS
REQUIRES FIRMWARE VERSION v8.1.11.1 OR

HIGHER AND POWER PACK OPTION (PP-1) ON THE
860 DSPi
Use the
the NET Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Tek RTP
Reflector : YES.
1.61
Option
Name Description
Code
FDR Frequency Domain When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, the
Reflectometer Frequency Domain Reflectometer Option (FDR) provides
Option a simple, convenient and accurate tool for determining the
(P/N 0930081016) distance to cable faults. The option works by sending a
sweep into the cable and analyzing the complex reflected
wave to determine the distance to various sources of
reflection (opens, shorts, splitters, etc.).
Use the
the RF Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text FDR :
YES.
1.62
Option
Name Description
Code
WIFI WI-FI When installed in an 860 DSPi, the Wi-Fi Option can be
(P/N 2072045001K) used to survey available access points, or to access a
network to perform tests such as ping, trace route,
throughput, VoIP, and verification of browser functionality.
This is a hardware and software option that includes a
built-in Wi-Fi Adapter, Ethernet Communications Option
(CI-5), and necessary software access codes. It can also
be used when connected to a Wi-Fi access point to
communicate data to TDM.

Use the
the NET Option
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Wi-Fi: YES.
Use the
the
Communication
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Wi-Fi:
followed by the
individual MAC
address of the Wi-Fi Receiver Board.
1.63
Upgrade Options For Existing Equipment
Trilithic offers the following upgrade kits to equip older equipment with all of the testing capability
of a new 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
860 DSP to 860 DSPi Upgrade

(P/N 2071511000)
When installed in an 860 DSP, this hardware provides a DOCSIS 2.0 Cable Modem to
upgrade the 860 DSP to an 860 DSPi.
To determine if an internal Use the
modem is installed in your device buttons to highlight
you must: the
Communications
1. Access the Setup Menu
Info field. If you have
from any Navigation
this hardware option
Menu by pressing the
Setup softkey. indicated by the text
CM#1: followed by
2. Select the i icon from
Info the individual MAC
the Setup Menu. address of the cable
Once in the Instrument modem.
Information Mode, follow the
instructions shown to the right.
1.64
1 GHz Upgrade for the 860 DSP & DSPi
(P/N 2071798000K)
When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this hardware provides a new or referbished RF
PCB board with an extended frequency range up to 1 GHz.
you must: the Calibration Info
field. If you have this
hardware option
from any Navigation
Setup softkey. RF: 1GHz (####),
where ####
Info indicates the version
the Setup Menu. of the installed
Once in the Instrument hardware.
1.65
Ethernet Communication Upgrades for the 860 DSP & 860 DSPi

you must: the Net Option Info
Field. If you have this
hardware option
from any Navigation
Setup softkey. Ethernet : YES (CI-
#), where #
2. Select the i icon from indicates which
Info
the Setup Menu. option (CI-1,

CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or
Once in the Instrument
CI-5) you have. The CI-1, CI-2, and CI-3 options are no longer
available.
Note: Options CI-1, CI-2, and CI-3 are no longer available.

Option CI-1 includes a 10 Base-T NIC.
Option CI-2 includes a 10 Base-T NIC and USB 1.1.
Option CI-3 includes a 10 Base-T NIC, USB 1.1, and CM
Through Mode.
Ethernet Communications Option (CI-4)

(P/N 2071667100K)
When installed in an 860 DSP, this option provides Ethernet connectivity to the internet through
an external cable modem. Ethernet Communications Option (CI-4) is currently available for the
860 DSP and non Wi-Fi equipped 860 DSPis.
This is a hardware kit that includes an Ethernet Communications Board (CI-4).

Option CI-4 includes a 10/100 Base-T NIC, USB 1.1, and CM Through Mode.
Ethernet Communications Option (CI-5)
When installed in an 860 DSP, this option provides Ethernet connectivity to the internet through
an external cable modem. Ethernet Communications Option (CI-5) is currently only available
with Wi-Fi equipped 860 DSPis and cannot be purchased separately.
This is a hardware kit that includes an Ethernet Communications Board (CI-5).

Option CI-5 includes a 10/100 Base-T NIC, USB 1.1, CM Through Mode, and Wi-Fi.
1.66
Enhanced Digital Retrofit (IL-2) for the 860 DSP & 860 DSPi
(P/N 2071569000K)
When installed in an 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, this option provides deep interleave support to
BER Mode and extended measurements of errored seconds and code word errors in the
QA-1 Option for the 860 DSP and the QA-2 Option for the 860 DSPi.
Enhanced Digital Video Retrofit (IL-2) is currently available, but the IL-1 Option is no longer
available. This is a hardware and software kit that includes an Enhanced Digital Video (IL-2)
board and necessary software access codes.
To determine if an internal Since this software
modem is installed in your option is bundled with
device you must: the IL-1 or IL-2
hardware option, there
1. Access the Setup
are three different
Menu from any
messages that can be
Navigation Menu by
displayed based on
pressing the Setup your software and
softkey. hardware configuration.
2. Select the i icon Use the buttons

Info
to highlight the RF
from the Setup Menu.
Option Info Field.
• If the IL-1 or IL-2 hardware option is installed and you
Information Mode, follow
have this software option installed, it will be indicated by
the instructions shown to the
the text Enhanced Dig Vid : YES.
right.
• If the IL-1 or IL-2 hardware option is installed and you do
not have this software option installed, it will be indicated
by the text Enhanced Dig Vid : Ready.
• If the IL-1 or IL-2 hardware option is not installed and you
have this software option installed, it will be indicated by
the text Enhanced Dig Vid : NO.
1.67
Enhanced Digital Retrofit (IL-2) for the 860 DSP & 860 DSPi (continued)
(P/N 2071569000K)
Use the buttons
to highlight the
Calibration Info Field.
If you have this
hardware option
Digital Video Ver ####,
where #### indicates
the version of the
installed hardware.
1.68
Modem Upgrades for the 860 DSPi
To determine if an internal Use the buttons

modem is installed in your to highlight the Cable
device you must: Modem Info Field.
1. Access the Setup Menu • The type of
from any Navigation modem you
Menu by pressing the have installed
Setup softkey. will be indicated
by the text
2. Select the i icon from Modem Type
Info
the Setup Menu. ##1#, ##2#, or

##3#, where
Once in the Instrument #### indicates the version of the installed modem and
Information Mode, follow the the third digit represents the DOCSIS type of 1, 2, or 3.
• If UGS is enabled on the installed modem, it will be
indicated by the text UGS Ready.
Use the buttons

to highlight the NET
Option Info Field. If
you have the Dual
Cable Modem
software option
Dual CM MAC : YES.
1.69
Modem Upgrades for the 860 DSPi (continued)
Use the buttons

to highlight the
Communication Info
Field. If you have the
Dual Cable Modem
hardware option
CM#1: and CM#2:
followed by the
individual MAC
address of each cable modem.
1.70
DOCSIS 1.X to DOCSIS 2.0 Modem Upgrade with

Unsolicited Grant Service
(P/N 2071506001K)
This upgrade is for any 860 DSPi that includes a DOCSIS 1.X cable modem.
This is a hardware and software upgrade that includes;
• New DOCSIS 2.0 cable modem with a firmware revision US2A or higher.
• Activation of Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS) which enables testing with QoS enabled.
DOCSIS 1.X to DOCSIS 2.0 Modem Upgrade with
Dual MAC Addresses & Unsolicited Grant Service
(P/N 2071506000)
This upgrade is for any 860 DSPi that includes a DOCSIS 1.X cable modem.
• New DOCSIS 2.0 cable modem with a firmware revision US2A or higher.
• The necessary software access codes to enable the cable modem to be configured with
two separate MAC addresses, which in turn enables provisioning an 860 DSPi
simultaneously on two separate CMTS’s that are served by the same DHCP server.
DOCSIS 2.0 Modem Upgrade to US2A Firmware with

Unsolicited Grant Service
(P/N 0930130000)
This upgrade is for any 860 DSPi that includes a DOCSIS 2.0 cable modem with a firmware
revision prior to US2A.
• Firmware update to Revision US2A or higher.
1.71
DOCSIS 2.0 Modem Software Upgrade with

Dual MAC Addresses & Unsolicited Grant Service
(P/N 0930081007)
This upgrade is for any 860 DSPi that includes a DOCSIS 2.0 cable modem with a firmware
revision of US2A or higher.
• The software upgrade that includes the necessary software access codes to enable the
cable modem to be configured with two separate MAC addresses, which in turn enables
provisioning an 860 DSPi simultaneously on two separate CMTS’s that are served by the
same DHCP server.
DOCSIS 1.X or DOCSIS 2.0 to DOCSIS 3.0 Modem Upgrade
(P/N 2072070001K)
This upgrade is for any 860 DSPi that includes a DOCSIS 1.X or DOCSIS 2.0 cable modem.
• This hardware and software upgrade includes a new DOCSIS 3.0 cable modem.
1.72
Wi-Fi Communications Upgrade for the 860 DSPi
(P/N 2072045001K)
When installed in an 860 DSPi, the Wi-Fi Option can be used to survey available access
points, or to access a network to perform tests such as ping, trace route, throughput, VoIP, and
verification of browser functionality. This is a hardware and software upgrade that includes a
built-in Wi-Fi Adapter, Ethernet Communications Option (CI-5), and necessary software
access codes. It can also be used when connected to a Wi-Fi access point to communicate
data to TDM.

you must: the NET Option
Info Field. If you
1. Access the Setup Menu have this hardware
from any Navigation option installed it
Menu by pressing the will be indicated by
Setup
softkey. the text Wi-Fi:
YES.
Info
the Setup Menu.

Information Mode, follow the Use the
instructions shown to the right. buttons to highlight
the
Communication
Info Field. If you
have this hardware
option installed it
the text Wi-Fi:
followed by the
individual MAC
address of the Wi-Fi Receiver Board.
1.73
860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Cable Analyzer
Section II: Installer Functions

1. Installer Functions Overview 1

Introduction
The instrument enables you to select from numerous testing and measurement procedures. The
instruments features several Installer Functions which come with the instrument, and it may have
one or more optional functions.
This section will provide you with instructions on how to utilize the functions available in the
Installer Menu of the instrument:
Note: The labels and the arrangement of the icons in this section are
the default settings of the instrument. The user’s display appearance
may be customized and therefore may differ from the Installer Menu
shown in this section. WorkBench software is required for customizing.
See the WorkBench operation manual for more details.
860 DSP 860 DSPi

Mode Description
Option Option
Displays the amplitude of the carriers included in a

Level
single channel, or the amplitude of a signal at a Standard Standard
selected frequency.
Level
Analyzes and displays the signal qualities of

Lite
digitally modulated signals displayed using a bar
QAM
graph of signal level and numeric values for MER N/A Standard
and pre/post FEC BER.
QAM Lite YOU MAY NOT HAVE THIS ICON, SEE NOTE 1
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Section II: Installer Functions
2.2
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
Performs all of the QAM Lite features plus it will
also display constellation, equalizer tap diagram, PP-1 and
QA-1
and BER graph. QA-2
YOU MAY NOT HAVE THIS ICON, SEE NOTE 1
The addition of the Enhanced Digital Video Retrofit
Option (IL-1 or IL-2) provides extended
measurements of errored seconds and code word IL-1 or IL-2 IL-1 or IL-2
QAM
errors in the QA-1 Option for the 860 DSP and the
QAM QA-2 Option for the 860 DSPi.
Displays the amplitude of all carrier, beats, and

other RF sources in the user-selectable spectrum
Spectrum from 4.0 MHz to 1.0 GHz with a resolution Standard PP-1
Spectrum bandwidth of 300 kHz.
Analyzer YOU MAY NOT HAVE THIS ICON, SEE NOTE 2
Ret
Spectrum
Return from 4.0 MHz to 65.0 MHz with a resolution N/A Standard
Spectrum bandwidth of 300 kHz.
Adv
Spectrum
from 4.0 MHz to 1.0 GHz with a user-selectable PP-1 and
SA-1
Advanced resolution bandwidth from 10.0 KHz to 3.0 MHz, SA-1
Spectrum and includes a Zero Span Function.
Measures the amplitudes of a pre-selected group

of carriers, and also computes the difference in
Standard Standard
amplitude between two selectable channels in the
Tilt
group.
Tilt
2.3
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
Standard
CM Stat Used to perform a quick view of the DOCSIS 1.X on DOCSIS
DOCSIS 2.0 and DOCSIS 2.0 cable modem information. N/A 1.X and 2.0
CM NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSP, SEE NOTE 3 Equipped
Statistics Devices
D3
Standard
CM Stat
Used to perform a quick view of the DOCSIS 3.0 on DOCSIS
DOCSIS 3.0 cable modem information. N/A 3.0
CM NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSP, SEE NOTE 3 Equipped
Statistics Devices
Used to measure various parameters that impact

call quality, and provides results to reveal proximity
CI-1, CI-2,
to potential failure.
IP
CI-3, or Standard
VoIP CI-4
(Works with ACTS Advanced Communication Test
VoIP Server located in the cable network.)
Tests the effective data rate of both the upstream CI-1, CI-2,
and downstream channels of a cable modem CI-3, or Standard
Thru Put connection. CI-4
Thru Put
Used to test the ratio of corrupted bits versus total
QA-1 Standard
bits of data for a selected channel.
The addition of the Enhanced Digital Retrofit
BER
Option (IL-1 or IL-2) provides deep interleave IL-1 or IL-2 Standard
Digital BER support to BER Mode.
Web Test CI-1, CI-2,

Used to perform a quick Web Browser connectivity
Web CI-3, or PP-1
test without entering the Web Browser menu.
Connectivity CI-4
Test
2.4
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
CI-1, CI-2,
WWW Used to access information from the internet. CI-3, or PP-1
Web CI-4
Browser
Auto Test
Performs a sequence of operations specified by a
Standard Standard
user-defined "macro".
Automatic
Test
Used as a shortcut to a user-defined "macro" that

is saved on the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi using the Requires Requires
scan WorkBench software, and displays an icon title that WorkBench WorkBench
Automatic is the name of the user-defined "macro" that is Software Software
Test Shortcut referenced.
Results
Auto Test Used to recall stored results of an AutoTest. Standard Standard

Automatic
Test Results
Provides the ability to PING the network connection CI-1, CI-2,

PING
to check network connectivity between network CI-3, or Standard
devices. CI-4
PING
This is a network utility which plots a route from
source to destination displaying all routers along
CI-1, CI-2,
the way in addition to the round trip time from the
CI-3, or Standard
source to the router. It also attempts to do a
Trace Rt CI-4
reverse domain name look up to display the
Trace Rt registered name of each router.
2.5
Note 1: The QAM Lite icon will appear on the 860 DSPi as a default
setting. The QAM Lite icon will be replaced with the QAM icon when
the QAM Option (QA-1 or QA-2) is installed.
Note 2: The Return Spectrum Analyzer icon will appear on the 860
DSPi as a default setting and will not appear on the 860 DSP in any
configuration. The Return Spectrum Analyzer icon will be replaced on
the 860 DSPi with the Spectrum Analyzer icon when the Power Pack
Option (PP-1) is installed. The Spectrum Analyzer icon will appear on
the 860 DSP as a default setting. The Spectrum Analyzer icon will be
replaced on the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi with the Advanced Spectrum
Analyzer icon when the Spectrum Analyzer Option (SA-1) is installed.
Note 3: Although this icon will appear on the 860 DSP, this mode is
not available for the 860 DSP. The 860 DSP must be upgraded to an
860 DSPi by installing the DOCSIS 2.0 modem to access this mode.
Each mode of the instrument can be accessed by selecting the corresponding icon as shown in
the previous table. Some modes may be inaccessible based on the options that have been
installed on the instrument. Optional modes for the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi are indicated by an
option code that is described in detail in Section I: The Basics, Chapter 7: Optional Software
and Hardware.
This section assumes you are at least familiar with the basic operation of the navigational tools
used in the instrument, so be sure to review Section I: The Basics, Chapter 4: Basic Navigation
before proceeding through this section.
To use some installer functions, you may have to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
completed Section I: The Basics, Chapter 5: Initial Setup before proceeding through this
section.
To use some installer functions, you will need to connect your instrument to your cable system.
2.6
Level 2. Level Mode 2

Introduction
In Level Mode the instrument displays the amplitude of the carriers included in a single channel, or
the amplitude of a signal at a selected frequency. The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come
equipped with the Level Mode as a standard feature.
This section will provide you with the basic
understanding of how to use Level Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Reference Level
• Setting Vertical Resolution
• Adjusting Channels and Frequencies
• Setting Channel Plan
• Setting Frequency Step
• Using the Goto Function
• Function Menu Options
Note: If your instrument does not include all of the features shown in
this chapter, go on-line to www.trilithic.com to update your firmware for
free. This will allow you to use all of the newest features that are
included in this mode.
Required Setup
To use Level Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
Section I: The Basics, Chapter 5: Initial Setup before proceeding through this chapter.
To use Level Mode, you will need to set up Level Mode. Be sure you have completed
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Measurement Settings
before proceeding through this chapter.
For SECAM L channels, you will need to set the Optimal Modulation; see Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Measurement Settings.
2.7
Level
Setting Reference Level

On the bar graph, vertical displacement represents
signal strength. The amplitude represented by the top
horizontal line on the graph is the reference level.
To change the reference level, use the buttons to
highlight Ref and then adjust the current value using the
buttons.
To quickly bring off scale signals on screen, press the
button, and then select Auto Range by pressing .
Setting Vertical Resolution

The XX dB/Div sets the vertical resolution for the graph.
To change the vertical resolution, use the buttons
to highlight XX dB/Div and then use the buttons to
set the vertical resolution to 1 dB, 2 dB, 5 dB, or 10 dB
per division as desired.
Selecting a low value will magnify the differences in the
amplitudes of the displayed signals, but will limit the
range of amplitudes that will fit on the graph.
Adjusting Channels and Frequencies

To change the channel or frequency, use the
buttons to highlight the channel number or frequency, use
the buttons to increment the value up and down or
enter the desired channel number or frequency using the
alphanumeric keypad, and then press the button.
2.8
Level
Setting Channel Plan

The instrument tunes channels according to a predefined
channel plan. The currently selected plan is displayed in
the title bar. To change the channel plan press the Plan
softkey. The Open File window will open. Use the
buttons to select the channel plan you want from the
list of channel plans available, and then press the
button.
You must have a system channel plan that is up to date in
order to view the channels in your system.
Changing Frequency Step Size

To change the frequency step size, press the Freq Step
softkey, use the buttons to select the frequency
step size you want from the list of frequency steps, and
then press the button. You may also select the
desired frequency step size by pressing the
corresponding alphanumeric button.
The first frequency step, in this case 100.000 MHz, is the
channel spacing that is configured in Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Level
Mode Settings.
The frequency step, in this case 100.000 MHz, that is marked with and asterisk (*) is the currently
selected frequency step.
2.9
Level
Using the Goto Function

The Goto softkey gives you rapid access to related measurement functions.
Goto Spectrum
From Level Mode you can jump to Spectrum Mode
with the spectrum analyzer settings automatically set
to display the current channel or frequency.
To change to Spectrum Mode, press the Goto
softkey, use the buttons to select Spectrum,
and then press the button. You may also select
Spectrum by pressing .
Once in Spectrum Mode, you may change any of the
analyzer settings as described in Chapter 4:
Spectrum Mode of this section of the manual.
Pressing the button will return you to Level Mode
at the originally selected channel.
2.10
Level
Goto Scan
If you are tuned to a channel, you can also jump to
Scan Mode with the marker automatically set to the
currently selected channel.
To change to Scan Mode, press the Goto softkey,
use the buttons to select Scan, and then press
the button. You may also select Scan by pressing
.
While in Scan Mode you can move the marker to
another channel of interest and then press to
return to Level Mode tuned to the new channel.
2.11
Level
Goto QAM
When tuned to a digital channel in Level Mode you can also go to QAM Mode with the QAM
settings automatically set to display the current channel or frequency.
To change to QAM Mode, press the Goto softkey, use the buttons to select QAM, and
then press the button. You may also select QAM by pressing .
You may change the channel in QAM Mode, however when you return to Level Mode using ,
you will return to the originally selected channel.
Note: QAM Lite Mode is a standard function of the 860 DSPi and
QAM Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi. To
view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information Mode. If you do not
have QAM Lite or QAM Mode installed in your instrument, you may
call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start using it
today.
2.12
Level
Function Menu Options

The Function Menu can be accessed by pressing the
button while in the Level Mode.
The following Function Menu options can be accessed
while in Level Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log
• Set Test Point Compensation
Basic Function Menu Options

The following functions are described in Section I: The Basics, Chapter 6: Basic Function
Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Auto Range Option

This option is used to quickly bring off scale signals
on screen by automatically adjusting the reference
level and vertical resolution.
buttons to highlight Auto Range, and then
press the button. You may also select Auto
Range by pressing .
2.13
Level
Set Test Point Compensation Feature

This feature allows the user to enter an offset that will
be added to all measurements made in Level Mode.
buttons to highlight Set TP Compensation,
Set TP Compensation by pressing .
• The Function Menu will close and the
Forward Compensation window will open.
• To enter an offset value for the test point or
probe, use the buttons to highlight
Test Point or Probe, enter the value using
the alphanumeric keypad, and then press
the button.
• To enable test point compensation, use the
buttons to highlight TP Mode, and
then use the buttons to change
between Enabled and Disabled.
• To resume measurement, press the
button.
• The Forward Compensation window will
close and the Level Mode will display the
combined (Test Point and Probe) test point
compensation value next to the channel
number.
2.14
Lite
QAM QAM 3. QAM Mode 3

Introduction
QAM Mode analyzes and displays the signal qualities of digitally modulated signals. The
860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with two different versions of the QAM analyzer as
follows:
• QAM Lite Mode - The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with this mode as the standard
QAM analyzer. This mode displays a bar graph of the signal level and numeric values for
MER and pre and post FEC BER. This mode is not available for the 860 DSP in any
configuration.
• QAM Mode - The 860 DSP and 860 DSPi can be upgraded to this mode by purchasing
the QAM Option (QA-1 or QA-2) respectively. This mode includes all of the features of
QAM Lite Mode plus digital constellation, equalizer tap diagram, and BER graph.
Note: Before the 860 DSPi can be upgraded to the QAM Mode by
purchasing the QAM Option (QA-2), you must first purchase the
Power Pack Option (PP-1).
• You can also upgrade the QAM Mode with the addition of the Enhanced Digital Video
Retrofit Option (IL-2). This option will provide support for decoding interleaved QAM
channels in the QA-1 Option for the 860 DSP and the QA-2 Option for the 860 DSPi. This
retrofit option is for instruments that were built before March 2005. Any instruments built
since this date are equipped with the IL-1 or IL-2 Retrofit Option as a standard feature.
understanding of how to use QAM Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Changing Digital Modulation Settings
• Setting the Display Mode
2.15
Lite
QAM QAM
have QAM Lite or QAM Mode installed in your instrument, you may
call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start using it
today.
Required Setup
To use QAM Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use QAM Mode, you will need to set up some QAM Mode. Be sure you have completed
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Digital Settings before
proceeding through this chapter.
To use the distance to fault function of the equalizer tap diagram in QAM Mode, you will need to
set up the cable velocity factor. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions,
Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Fwd Sweep Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
2.16
Lite
QAM QAM

button.
The instrument will tune to and measure QAM
parameters for channels defined as digital in your
channel plan.
You must have a system channel plan that is up to date in order to view the channels in your
system.

To change the channel or frequency, use the buttons to highlight the channel number or
frequency, use the buttons to increment the value
up and down or enter the desired channel number or
frequency using the alphanumeric keypad, and then
press the button.
You may enter any channel number in your plan. If the
channel is not designated as digital in your plan, the
message Not A Digital Channel will be displayed in the
message bar at the bottom of the screen and the
instrument will beep.
The instrument will default to 64 QAM when tuning by
frequency. To temporarily change the modulation type
you must first enter a new frequency.
2.17
Lite
QAM QAM
Changing Digital Modulation Settings

To change the digital modulation settings, tune to a
channel by frequency, use the buttons to highlight
the desired setting and then use the buttons to
increment the value up and down or enter the desired
value using the alphanumeric keypad and then press the
button.
Select from the following modulation types:
• QPSK, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 QAM-Annex A:
Euro modulation
• 64 and 256 QAM-Annex B: US DOCSIS
modulation
Setting the Display Mode

QAM Mode has four display options; bar graph, digital constellation, equalizer tap diagram, and
BER graph. To change display modes use the Display softkey to toggle between the displays.
Using the Bar Graph Display

The bar graph display is useful for quickly
determining the level and quality of a digital signal.
The level is displayed as a bar graph with an
associated numerical value. Verifying that a digital
channel’s level MER and BER are within acceptable
limits is usually all that is necessary to insure that a
digital channel will operate properly.
2.18
Lite
QAM QAM
Using the Constellation Display

The constellation display graphs symbol values on an
I and Q grid. The constellation display is useful for
observing impairments in the digital signal.
An optimum constellation has symbol clusters that
are compact dots in the center of each symbol box.
By observing the shape of the symbol clusters and
their location relative to their optimum location in the
constellation, it is possible to draw some conclusions
about the nature of an impairment.
For example, broadband noise causes symbol
clusters to enlarge. Symbol clusters with a hole in the
center indicate coherent interference like CSO/CTB, spurs or ingress. Phase noise in
headend converters causes the symbol clusters to appear as arcs particularly those near the
edges of the constellation. A constellation with the corner symbol clusters drawn inward
indicates gain compression.
Using the Zoom Feature

The instrument allows you to easily zoom in or out
on a constellation display.
To zoom in on a constellation display, press the
Zoom In softkey. A selection window will appear in
the display.
Use the buttons to place the

selection window on the desired location then
press the Zoom In softkey. If the selection window
still appears, you can continue to zoom in by
positioning the window and pressing the Zoom In
softkey.
To zoom out from a constellation display press the Zoom Out softkey. Press the Zoom Out
softkey repeatedly to zoom out further.
2.19
Lite
QAM QAM
Using the Equalizer Tap Diagram

The equalizer tap diagram shows the relative
amplitude of the equalizer taps needed to correct
phase and amplitude distortions in the QAM signal.
The equalizer tap diagram is useful in determining
presence of reflections. You can get an approximate
distance to fault indication by using the Eq Left or
Eq Right softkeys to place the indicator on the tap of
interest.
Using the BER Graph

The BER graph shows the ratio of corrupted bits to
total bits in the QAM signal. The analyzer dwells on
the selected channel, counting good bits and
watching for individual corrupted bits. The BER graph
shows errored bits as vertical lines that expand
horizontally across the display with advancing time.
• Gray: These lines indicate repaired bits
• Black: These lines represent unrepairable
bits
2.20
Lite
QAM QAM

button while in the QAM Mode.
while in QAM Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Auto Range Option

on screen.
Range by pressing .
2.21
Lite
QAM QAM
Set Test Point Compensation Option

This option is used to enter an offset that will be
added to all level measurements.
the button.
button.
close and the QAM Mode will display the
number.
2.22

Ret Adv
Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum 4. Spectrum Mode 4

Introduction
The Spectrum Mode displays the amplitude of all carriers, beats and other RF sources in a user-
selectable spectrum. In this mode the instrument displays RF amplitude as a power-vs-frequency
line graph. Also displayed are the frequencies selected for the two markers, the RF amplitude of
any signals at those frequencies and the difference between the amplitudes. An automatic marker
identifies the highest amplitude signal in the displayed spectrum.
The Spectrum Mode draws a graph of all of the RF sources present in a selected span of
frequencies. Spectrum Mode differs from Scan Mode in that the sources do not have to be
included in a pre-selected channel plan.
The 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with three different versions of the spectrum
analyzer as follows:
• Spectrum Mode - The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with this mode as the standard
spectrum analyzer. This mode includes a frequency range of 4 MHz to 1.0 GHz and is
limited to a fixed bandwidth set at 300 kHz. The 860 DSPi can be upgraded to this mode
by purchasing the Power Pack Option (PP-1).
• Return Spectrum Mode - The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with this mode as the
standard spectrum analyzer. This mode includes a frequency range of 4 MHz to 65 MHz
and is limited to a fixed bandwidth set at 300 kHz. This mode is not available for the
860 DSP in any configuration.
• Advanced Spectrum Mode - The 860 DSP and 860 DSPi can be upgraded to this mode
by purchasing the Spectrum Analyzer Option (SA-1). This mode includes an adjustable
bandwidth that can be set as narrow as 10 kHz to as wide as 3 MHz, zero span
capabilities, and a frequency range of 4 MHz to 1.0 GHz.
Note: To view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV:
Setup Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information Mode. If you do not
have Spectrum Mode or Advanced Spectrum Mode installed in your
instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order these options
and start using them today.
2.23
Ret Adv
Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum

understanding of how to use Spectrum Mode
including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Resolution Bandwidth
• Setting Amplitude Limits
• Detector Settings
• Marker Settings
• Setting Frequency Parameters
• Zero Span Measurements
• Hold Settings
Required Setup
To use Spectrum Mode, you are not required to perform any setup procedures.
2.24
Ret Adv

On the spectrum graph, vertical displacement represents
signal strength. The horizontal axis represents a range of
frequencies, with the lowest represented frequency on
the left edge of the graph, the highest on the right edge.
The amplitude represented by the top horizontal line on
the graph is the reference level. In this mode the
reference level also controls gain in the RF front end. It is
possible to overload the RF front end if the reference
level is too low.
highlight Ref, and then adjust the current value using the
buttons.
Note: If Overload appears in the bottom right message bar it is

because the input signals are overloading the instrument. Increase
the reference level until the message disappears or use the Auto
Range Function by pressing the button and then selecting .
2.25
Ret Adv
Setting Resolution Bandwidth

The resolution bandwidth setting determines how close together in frequency two signals can be
and still be represented individually on the spectrum display.
Instruments with Spectrum Mode and Return Spectrum Mode have a resolution that is fixed at
300 kHz, a useful bandwidth for most wide-span spectrum scans.
Instruments with Advanced Spectrum Mode can be set to resolutions of 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100
kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, or 3 MHz.
The RBW XXX kHz and RBW XXX MHz sets the
resolution bandwidth for the graph. To change the
resolution bandwidth, first use the buttons to
highlight RBW XXX kHz or RBW XXX MHz, then use
the buttons to set the resolution bandwidth as
desired.
Narrow resolution bandwidth settings are most useful
for tests run at narrow frequency spans, such as hunting
for spurious or reverse ingress, especially at
frequencies near RF carriers.
Broad resolution bandwidth settings are most useful for
measuring the true power of some digital modulation formats.
2.26
Ret Adv
Setting Amplitude Limits

The Lim = XX sets an amplitude limit threshold for
testing of ingress problems on the return band. When the
amplitude of a displayed signal exceeds the limit
threshold, the instrument will beep.
To use this option, use the buttons to highlight
Lim = XX, and then press the buttons to increase
or decrease the amplitude limit threshold.
• A dark horizontal line will appear on the screen
when the amplitude limit threshold is lower than
the reference level.
• To enable the use of limit beeps, press the
button, use the buttons to highlight Limit
Beeps On, and then press the button. You
may also select Limit Beeps On by pressing .
• To disable the use of limit beeps, press the
button, use the buttons to highlight Limit
Beeps Off, and then press the button. You
may also select Limit Beeps Off by pressing .

to highlight XX dB/Div, and then use the buttons to
2.27
Ret Adv
Detector Settings
The number of scans that are averaged is settable in the instrument using the Detector settings.
The Detector settings allows you to smooth out noise “jitter” on the spectrum display by averaging
a succession of spectrum scans. Its effect is similar to that of a video filter in a bench-top
spectrum analyzer. Reducing display jitter is most useful when you are looking for small signals,
such as spurious or common path distortions in the presence of noise.
To use this option, press the Detector softkey, use the
buttons to highlight the desired detector setting of
Averaging, Dwell Wide, or Dwell Narrow and then
press the button. You may also select the desired
detector setting by pressing the corresponding
alphanumeric button.
• Use the Averaging setting to perform
measurements of the power of digital signals and
to display the noise floor of signals.
• Use the Dwell Narrow and Dwell Wide settings
to catch fast upstream modem bursts and fast noise bursts.
• Dwell Narrow - This setting is slower than Dwell Wide, but displays the measurement
more like an analog spectrum analyzer display.
• Dwell Wide - This setting is faster than Dwell Narrow, but displays the measurement
less like an analog spectrum analyzer display.
To change the number of times that the detector dwells
on a frequency, use the buttons to highlight the
detector settings status area shown in the figure, then
use the buttons to set the value as follows:
• Averaging - Norm, Avg 8, Avg 16, Avg 32, Avg
64, Avg 128, and Avg 256
• Dwell Wide - Norm, Dwl W 8, Dwl W 16,
Dwl W 32, Dwl W 64, Dwl W 128, and Dwl W 256
• Dwell Narrow - Norm, Dwl N 8, Dwl N 16,
Dwl N 32, Dwl N 64, Dwl N 128, and Dwl N 256
Selecting a low value will decrease the chance of detecting data bursts and provide a faster less
accurate result and selecting a high value will increase the chance of detecting data bursts and
provide a slower more accurate result.
2.28
Ret Adv
Marker Settings
The instrument displays two frequency-settable markers
as dark vertical lines on the scale. These markers can
be used to make amplitude measurements of carriers at
user-selected frequencies, or to determine the difference
(Delta) in amplitude between two selected carriers.
To set a marker to a frequency, use the buttons to
highlight Marker A or Marker B, then increment the
marker to higher or lower frequencies using the
buttons. You can also enter a frequency directly using the
alphanumeric keypad and pressing the button.
The Marker softkey allows you to set a carrier of interest in the center of the display then
conveniently “zoom” in on it by reducing the Span
setting.
To use this option, press the Marker softkey, use the
buttons to highlight the desired marker setting of
Center => Marker 1, Center => Marker 2, or Start=M1/
Stop=M2 and then press the button. You may also
select the desired marker setting by pressing the
corresponding alphanumeric button. The Marker softkey
accesses the following functions:
• Center => Marker 1 - sets the displayed
spectrum’s center frequency to the current setting
of Marker A.
• Center => Marker 2 - sets the displayed spectrum’s center frequency to the current setting
of Marker B.
• Start=M1/Stop=M2 - sets the far left edge of the displayed spectrum to the current
frequency of Marker A, and the far right edge to the frequency of Marker B. This allows you
to select a “slice” of the spectrum then expand it to the full width of the display.
2.29
Ret Adv
Setting Frequency Parameters

The actual frequency range represented by the horizontal axis of the graph can be set in one of
three ways as follows:
Center/Span
This option allows you to enter the frequency
represented by the center vertical grid line (Center)
and the total frequency width of the display (Span).
To use this option, press the Tuning softkey, use the
buttons to highlight Center/Span, and then
press the button. You may also select
Center/Span by pressing .
• Use the buttons to highlight Center,
and then use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the center frequency, and then press the
button.
• Use the buttons to highlight Span, and
then use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the
span frequency, and then press the button.
2.30
Ret Adv
Start/Stop
represented by the farthest left vertical grid line
(Start) and the farthest right vertical grid line (Stop).
buttons to highlight Start/Stop, and then press
the button. You may also select Start/Stop by
pressing .
• Use the buttons to highlight Start, and
start frequency, and then press the button.
• Use the buttons to highlight Stop, and
stop frequency, and then press the button.
2.31
Ret Adv
Channel
represented by the farthest left vertical grid line
(Start) and the farthest right vertical grid line (Stop)
as well as being able to increment the Start or Stop
frequencies by the selected channel spacing.
buttons to highlight Channel, and then press
the button. You may also select Channel by
pressing .
• Use the buttons to highlight Start, and
center frequency, and then press the
button.
• Use the buttons to highlight Stop, and
span frequency, and then press the button.
• When Start or Stop are highlighted, use the
buttons to increment the frequency up or
down by the selected channel spacing. To set
the frequency spacing between channels, you
will need to set the Channel Spacing, see
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2:
Instrument Setup Mode, Level Mode Settings.
2.32
Ret Adv
Zero Span Measurements

With the Center/Span setting selected and with Span set to 0 MHz, the zero span measurement
mode is enabled. This allows “time domain” measurements to be performed on signals.
In the zero span measurement mode, you can measure timing relationships or measure the
amplitude of a waveform at a settable time interval after a user-set amplitude trigger.
In effect, this mode converts the instrument into a tunable receiver connected to a digital
oscilloscope, but displaying power in dBmV rather than +/- volts.
The zero span measurement mode is useful for detecting transient noise and bursts of data
transmissions. It may also be used to compare the amplitudes of TDMA sources sharing the same
frequency.
To use the zero span measurement mode, press the Tuning softkey, use the buttons to
highlight
Center/Span, and then press the button. You may
also select Center/Span by pressing .
• Use the buttons to highlight Span, press
the button, and then press the
button.
• The detector settings status area in the upper left
of the display window will change to Trig.
• Two small horizontal and vertical arrows will
appear on the display to indicate the voltage and
time triggers.
• The horizontal resolution settings will appear on
the display between the Center and Span.
• The frequency settings of the variable markers will
change to time settings. The units of the variable
markers will match the units of the horizontal
resolution settings.
2.33
Ret Adv
Setting Triggers
When the instrument is in zero span measurement
mode, the small horizontal and vertical arrows that
appear on the display are voltage and time triggers.
These control which point in a displayed waveform
will be used as a reference for time interval
measurements, and where that point will appear in
the display window.
To set the voltage trigger, use the buttons to
highlight Trig. Press buttons to set the voltage
trigger to the point on the waveform that you wish
measurements to be referenced from.
Trigger Modes
You can set the trigger point on the rising side of the
waveform or the trailing side.
To set the trigger mode, use the buttons to
highlight the second heading from the right, above the
display window. (It may indicate (+), (-), or Auto,
depending on how it was last set.)
• Press the buttons to select a rising

trigger (+) or a falling trigger (-). Being able to
set this parameter enables you to for example,
trigger on the lead or trailing side of a pulse,
or to capture a trace when a burst of data starts, or when it ends.
• You can also select Auto, which automatically manages the trigger settings for you. This
is a useful feature when you are setting up the instrument to display a waveform
because Auto always provides a view of the waveform, even if some measurement
parameters are not yet set.
2.34
Ret Adv
Setting Markers
While operating in zero span measurement mode,
markers denote time intervals, rather than
frequencies.
You can set one marker to measure the waveform
amplitude at a settable delay after the trigger or you
can set both markers and measure the amplitude
difference between two points in the waveform.
To set a marker, use the buttons to highlight
Marker A or Marker B, enter the desired interval
before or after the time trigger at which you want the
marker to appear by using the alphanumeric keypad,
and then press the button. Also, you can increment the marker value by pressing the
buttons. The display will now show the setting of each marker, the amplitudes of the displayed
waveform at those points, and the time and amplitude differences between them.
2.35
Ret Adv
Hold Settings
The Hold softkey will allow the user to hold the minimum or maximum value of the spectrum
being displayed on the instrument screen.
The user may choose, None, Max, or Min as the Hold setting value.
None
The None selection disables the Hold setting.
To use the None selection of the Hold setting, press
the Hold softkey, use the buttons to highlight
None, and then press the button. You may also
select None by pressing .
Max
The Max selection will hold the maximum value of the
spectrum being displayed.
To use the Max selection of the Hold setting, press
the Hold softkey, use the buttons to highlight
Max, and then press the button. You may also
select Max by pressing .
Min
The Min selection will hold the minimum value of the
spectrum being displayed.
To use the Min selection of the Hold setting, press the
Hold softkey, use the buttons to highlight Min,
Min by pressing .
2.36
Ret Adv

button while in the Spectrum Mode.
while in Spectrum Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log
• Limit Beeps On/Off
• Toggle Peak Hold
Note: For more information on Limit Beeps On/Off, see Setting

Amplitude Limits in this chapter.

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.37
Ret Adv
Auto Range Option

on screen.
Range by pressing .

added to all measurements made in Spectrum
Mode.
the button.
button.
2.38
Ret Adv

close and the Spectrum Mode will display the
compensation value in the upper right portion
of the spectrum analyzer display.
Toggle Peak Hold

This option is used to hold the maximum signal level
at each frequency, scanned over time.
buttons to highlight Toggle Peak Hold, and
then press the button. You may also select Toggle
Peak Hold by pressing .
2.39
Tilt 5. Tilt Mode 5

Introduction
In Tilt Mode the instrument measures the amplitudes of a pre-selected group of carriers, and also
computes the difference in amplitude between two selectable channels in the group. This function
may be used to quickly measure several especially important channels or to calculate distribution
system unflatness.
In Tilt Mode the instrument displays the amplitudes of up to 10 pre-selected carriers in a bar
graph.
Note: Do not select more than 10 channels from your channel plan to
be included in the Tilt measurement. When performing the Tilt
measurement, the instrument will only use the first 10 channels from
the active channel plan that are selected for Tilt measurement.
The amplitudes of the highest and lowest carriers, and their difference, are displayed numerically.
You may also display the amplitudes of all Tilt plan carriers numerically.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Tilt Mode as a standard feature.
This section will provide you with the basic understanding of how to use Tilt Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Low and High Tilt Channels
• Changing Display Mode
2.40
Tilt
Required Setup
To use Tilt Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed

buttons.

2.41
Tilt

button.
Setting the Low and High Tilt Channels

The Low and High channels used for computing tilt can
be changed by pressing either the Low or High
softkey. The Low and High channels selected will
appear as solid bars in the graph.
2.42
Tilt
Changing Display Mode

You can toggle the display between a bar graph and a
numeric display.
To use this feature, press the button, use the
buttons to highlight Change Display Mode, and
Display Mode by pressing .
In the numeric display the instrument lists the levels for all
Tilt channels.
2.43
Tilt

button while in the Tilt Mode.
while in Tilt Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log
• Change Display Mode
Note: For more information on Change Display Mode, see

Changing Display Mode in this chapter.

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.44
Tilt
Auto Range Option

on screen, by automatically adjusting the reference
Range by pressing .

added to all measurements made in Tilt Mode.
the button.
button.
2.45
Tilt

close and the Tilt Mode will display the
compensation value in the upper right portion
of the screen.
2.46
CM Stat 6. CM Stat Mode (DOCSIS 2.0) 6

Introduction
In CM Stat Mode the instrument displays a quick view of the internal cable modem information.
The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the CM Stat Mode as a standard feature. This mode
is not available for the 860 DSP in any configuration.
understanding of how to use CM Stat Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Measurement Data
Required Setup
To use CM Stat Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use CM Stat Mode, you will need to set up the internal cable modem. Be sure you have
completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, CM/CPE Settings
2.47
CM Stat

Verify in the status bar that the field to the left of the time says RDY. This indicates that the
instrument is ready to connect to the cable modem network.
seconds if SSL is installed) after the instrument is turned on, power
the unit off and back on. If the RDY message never shows up, you
may not have Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5) installed
on your 860 DSP.

PING
the Installer menu. The Logging On To Network

window will show the progress of the logon process.
When logon is complete, the PING function will be
displayed.
Note: If you have not set the default downstream data carrier
frequency or it is incorrect, it may take several minutes for the modem
to find the downstream data carrier.
Measurement Data
The CM Stat Mode displays connections statistics for the internal cable modem. The instrument
will display the downstream and upstream frequency, transfer rate, and power level as well as the
downstream modulation type, signal-to-noise ratio, corrected bits, and uncorrected bits.
2.48
CM Stat

Goto Throughput
From CM Stat Mode you can jump to Throughput
Mode.
To change to Throughput Mode, press the Goto
softkey, use the buttons to select Throughput,
Throughput by pressing .
Once in Throughput Mode, you may test the internal
cable modem as described in Chapter 11:
Throughput Mode of this section of the manual.
Pressing the button will return you to CM Stat
Mode.
2.49
CM Stat
Goto PING / LPR

From CM Stat Mode you can jump to PING Mode.
To change to PING Mode, press the Goto softkey,
use the buttons to select PING / LPR, and then
press the button. You may also select PING / LPR
by pressing .
Once in PING Mode, you may test the internal cable
modem as described in Chapter 8: PING Mode of
this section of the manual. Pressing the button will
return you to CM Stat Mode.
2.50
CM Stat

button while in the CM Stat Mode.
while in CM Stat Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Upstream Correction
• Downstream Correction

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.51
7. CM Stat Mode (DOCSIS 3.0) 7
D3
CM Stat
Introduction
In CM Stat Mode the instrument displays a quick view of the internal cable modem information.
The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the CM Stat Mode as a standard feature. This mode
understanding of how to use CM Stat Mode including:
• Required Setup
Required Setup
To use CM Stat Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use CM Stat Mode, you will need to set up the internal cable modem. Be sure you have
2.52
D3
CM Stat

seconds if SSL is installed) after the instrument is turned on, power
the unit off and back on. If the RDY message never shows up, you
may not have Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5) installed
on your 860 DSP.

PING

When logon is complete, the PING function will be
displayed.
Measurement Data
The CM STAT Mode displays connections statistics for the internal cable modem. The instrument
2.53
D3
CM Stat

Goto Throughput
From CM Stat Mode you can jump to Throughput
Mode.
To change to Throughput Mode, press the Goto
softkey, use the buttons to select Throughput,
Throughput by pressing .
Once in Throughput Mode, you may test the internal
cable modem as described in Chapter 11:
Throughput Mode of this section of the manual.
Pressing the button will return you to CM Stat
Mode.
2.54
D3
CM Stat
Goto PING/ LPR

From CM Stat Mode you can jump to PING Mode.
To change to PING Mode, press the Goto softkey,
use the buttons to select PING / LPR, and then
press the button. You may also select PING / LPR
by pressing .
Once in PING Mode, you may test the internal cable
modem as described in Chapter 8: PING Mode of
this section of the manual. Pressing the button will
return you to CM Stat Mode.
2.55
D3
CM Stat

button while in the CM Stat Mode.
while in CM Stat Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Upstream Correction
• Downstream Correction

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.56
PING 8. PING Mode 8

Introduction
In PING Mode the instrument has the ability to ping a host on the network connection. This is
extremely useful for checking network connectivity between network devices. The basic 860 DSPi
comes equipped with the PING Mode as a standard feature. In order to use the PING Mode on your
860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5).
This section will provide you with a basic understanding of how to use PING Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Entering a Host Name or IP
• Editing Packet Delay
• Editing Packet Size
• Pinging the Network
• Viewing Modem Information
Note: PING Mode is standard on the 860 DSPi, but is an optional

function of the 860 DSP. To view the installed functions on your
instrument, see Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument
Information Mode. If you do not have PING Mode installed in your
instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option
and start using it today.
2.57
PING
Required Setup
To use PING Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use PING Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal cable
modem. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
To use Wi-Fi Mode with an internal Wi-Fi adapter, you will need to setup the internal Wi-Fi

Note: If the instrument does not indicate RDY within 10 seconds

(30 seconds if SSL is installed) after the instrument is turned on, power
the unit off and back on. If the RDY message never shows up, you may
not have Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5) installed on
your 860 DSP.

SLM/Forward Input, then select the icon from
PING

When logon is complete, the PING Mode will be
displayed.
2.58
PING
External RJ45 Port

instrument’s Ethernet Port, then select the icon
PING

displayed.
Wi-Fi
Select the icon from the Utility Menu.

displayed.
2.59
PING
Entering a Host Name or IP

You will need to enter an address to ping. You can enter
either the Host Name (i.e. www.860dsp.com) or the
Host IP (i.e. 207.67.51.2).
• To enter the Host Name, use the buttons
to highlight Host Name, press the button,
enter the name you want to ping using the
alphanumeric keypad, and then press the
button.
• To enter the Host IP, use the buttons to
highlight Host IP, enter the address you want to
ping using the alphanumeric keypad, and then
press the button.
• To select from the pre-stored favorite web
addresses, press the Favorite softkey, use the
buttons to highlight desired web address, and
then press the button. You may also select the
desired web address by pressing the
Note: Notice the IP address of your instrument is displayed in the title

bar at the top of the screen.
Note: The first four web addresses entered in the Host Name or Host
IP fields will be stored as favorites. To clear the list and save a new
series of favorites, refer to the section Function Menu Options, Clear
Favorites in this chapter.
2.60
PING
Editing Packet Delay

The packet delay determines how often packets are
transmitted. To change the packet delay use the
buttons to highlight Pkt Delay and use the buttons
to change the packet delay. The packet delay can be set
between 10 msec and 1000 msec in 10 msec
increments.
Editing Packet Size

The packet size determines the size of the transmitted
packet payload. To change the packet size use the
buttons to highlight Pkt Size and use the
buttons to change the packet size. The packet size can
be set to 0, 32, 64, 256, 512, 768, or 1024 bytes.
2.61
PING
Pinging the Network Host

To ping the host, press the Start softkey.
The instrument will continue to ping the host and update
the status of the test on the screen until you press the
Stop softkey.
A successful ping will display zero Lost packets as the
number of packets Sent and Received increases.
An unsuccessful ping will display an increasing LPR
(Lost Packet Rate) as the number of packets Sent and
Received increases.
Viewing Modem Information

To view internal modem information, press the Modem
softkey. Pressing the button will return you to PING
Mode.
2.62
PING

button while in the PING Mode.
while in PING Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Clear Favorites
• Display CPE IP or Display IP

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Clear Favorites
This option is used to clear the list of pre-stored
favorites that are shown when the Favorite softkey is
selected.

buttons to highlight Clear Favorites, and then press
the button. You may also select Clear Favorites
by pressing .
After you clear the favorites, the instrument will
remember the next four addresses that are entered.
2.63
PING
Display CPE IP
To use this feature, press the button, use the
buttons to highlight Display CPE IP, and then press
the button. You may also select Display CPE IP
by pressing .
Display CPE IP window will open.
• To exit the Display CPE IP window, press the
button.
Note: Display CPE IP is only shown when using an internal cable

modem connection.
Note: When connected to a cable modem in the field, the 860 DSP
or 860 DSPi is considered as Customer Premise Equipment (CPE).
The Display CEP IP function displays the IP address and connection
settings for the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi when installed as CPE.
2.64
Trace Rt 9. Trace Route Mode 9

Introduction
The Trace Route Mode is a network utility which plots a route from the source to the destination
while displaying all the routers along the way. It also displays the round trip route time from the
source to the router.
It also attempts to do a reverse domain name look up to display the registered name of each
router.
of how to use Trace Route Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Trace Route Mode Support
• Entering a Host Name or IP
Required Setup
To use Trace Route Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use Trace Setup Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal cable
2.65
Trace Rt
Note: Trace Route Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP. To

have Trace Route Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start using it today.
Trace Route Mode Support

To determine if your instrument supports Trace Route
Mode, perform the following:
• Select the Setup softkey.
• Select the i icon.

Info
• Examine the version. If the firmware version is

8.1.1.1 or higher, your instrument supports Trace
Route Mode.
2.66
Trace Rt
Entering a Host Name or IP

You will need to enter an address to ping. You can enter either the Host Name (i.e.
www.860dsp.com) or the Host IP (i.e. 207.250.51.130).
To enter the Host Name:
• Use the buttons to highlight Host Name,
and then press the button.
• Use the alphanumeric keypad and enter the Host
Name you want to trace, and then press the
button.
To enter the Host IP address:
• Use the buttons to highlight Host IP, and
• Use the alphanumeric keypad and enter the Host IP address you want to trace, and then
press the button.
• To select from a list of pre-stored favorite web addresses, press the Favorite softkey, use
the buttons to highlight desired web address, and then press the button. You may
also select the desired web address by pressing the corresponding alphanumeric button.
• Select the Start softkey to begin the trace.
• Select the Stop softkey to stop the trace.
2.67
Trace Rt
The display screen continuously displays the trace route

in a loop. This allows the user to see if a particular router
is intermittently passing ping packets and if different
routes are being taken.
This feature can be disabled by removing the Continuous
Run option, which is accessed by pressing the key.
Note: There is no guarantee that every ping packet will follow the same
route.
Standard Functions
• Contrast Freeze
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Optional Functions
• Clear Favorites
• Display IP or Display CPE IP
• Run Test Continuous

• Clear Favorites
• Display CPE IP
• Display IP
• Run Test Continuous
2.68
VoIP
IP
10. VoIP Mode 10

Introduction
In VoIP Mode the instrument can test a variety of call and connection quality parameters using
either a built in modem or an external modem. The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the
VoIP Mode as a standard feature. In order to use the VoIP Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument
must be equipped with Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5).
The instrument tests the various measurable parameters that impact call quality, and provides
measurement results to test proximity to potential failure. This test utilizes a network protocol
called RTP (Real Time Protocol). The instrument will establish a connection to the indicated server
on port 24007. The instrument and the server negotiate the test parameters from the Instrument
Setup Mode as well as synchronize their clocks. The server and the meter then communicate
using RTP over UDP protocol on port 24007. Once all of the packets are transmitted and received
by both the server and the meter, the results are calculated and compared to user-defined limits.
An ACTS (Advanced Communication Test System) server is also required, and ideally will be
installed in the cable network near the gateway.
of how to use VoIP Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Entering the Server IP
• Running a VoIP Test
• Viewing VoIP Test Details
Note: VoIP Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP. To view the
installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV: Setup
have VoIP Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at
(800) 344-2412 to order this option and start using it today.
this chapter. Be sure to go on-line to www.trilithic.com to update your
firmware for free. This will allow you to use all of the newest features
that are included in this mode.
2.69
IP
VoIP
Required Setup
To use VoIP Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use VoIP Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal cable modem.
Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode,
CM/CPE Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
To use VoIP Mode, you will need to setup VoIP Mode. Be sure you have completed Section IV:
Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, VoIP Settings before proceeding through
this chapter.
In order for your instrument to test the upstream and downstream data rate it must send and
receive a file from a server. This server will need to be setup by your IT department prior to using
VoIP Mode. It is preferable to use a server located within your local system to prevent skewing of
the throughput results due to extensive routing or Internet traffic. The server application must be
either the Trilithic VoIP RTP test server or the Trilithic Advanced Communication Test Server.
2.70
IP
VoIP

860 DSP.

SLM/Forward input, then select the VoIP
IP icon from
When logon is complete, the VoIP Mode will be
displayed.
External RJ45 Port

instrument’s Ethernet port, then select the IP icon
VoIP

displayed.
2.71
IP
VoIP
Wi-Fi
Select the icon from the Installer Menu.

displayed.
Entering the Server IP

You will need to enter the address of the server to
connect to.
To enter the Server IP, use the buttons to highlight
Server IP, press the button, enter the address of the
server you want to connect to using the alphanumeric
keypad, and then press the button.
Running a VoIP Test

To run the VoIP Test, press the Start softkey.
The instrument will display the progress of the VoIP Test
on the bar graph.
When the test is complete, the instrument will display
upstream and downstream results for Latency, Jitter,
and MOS. The “P” or “F” next to the upstream and
downstream results indicates the pass or fail status of
the test.
2.72
IP
VoIP
Viewing VoIP Test Details

To view detailed results of the VoIP Test, press the
Details softkey.
The Results window will open. If the results occupy more
than one screen, use the button to scroll through the
results.
Press the button to return to the VoIP Mode.

button while in the VoIP Mode.
while in VoIP Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Display CPE IP
• High Priority Ping

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.73
IP
VoIP
Display CPE IP
by pressing .
• To exit the Display CPE IP window press the
button.
High Priority On/Off

The High Priority function allows the 860 DSP or 860
DSPi to instruct the CMTS to hold open time slots for
the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi’s cable modem to
communicate over. To use this option, press the
button, use the buttons to highlight High
Priority On, and then press the button. You may
also select Display CPE IP by pressing .
• The Function Menu will close and the screen
will return to the VoIP window will open.
• To turn off High Priority, press the button,
use the buttons to highlight High Priority Off, and then press the button. You
may also select High Priority Off by pressing .
2.74
Thru Put 11. Thru Put Mode 11

Introduction
In Thru Put Mode the instrument can test the effective data rate of both the upstream and
downstream channels of a cable modem connection using either a built in modem or an external
modem. The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the Thru Put Mode as a standard feature. In
order to use the Thru Put Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Ethernet
Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5).
The instrument tests the data rate by sending and receiving a file from a Trilithic test server on the
network. The instrument comes with a 1 MB upstream test file keyed to your instrument’s MAC
address.
of how to use Thru Put Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting the Server IP
• Setting the Downstream file
• Running an Upstream Test
• Running a Downstream Test
• Viewing Modem Information
Note: Thru Put Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP. To view
the installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV: Setup
have Thru Put Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic
at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start using it today.
2.75
Thru Put
Required Setup
To use Thru Put Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use Thru Put Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal cable
In order for your instrument to test the upstream and downstream data rate it must send and
receive a file from a Trilithic ACTS server. This server will need to be setup by your IT department
prior to using Thru Put Mode. It is preferable to use a server located within your local system to
prevent skewing of the throughput results due to extensive routing or Internet traffic. The server
must support the file transfer protocols used by the instrument.
Trilithic recommends using the Trilithic Advanced Communication Server application.
To see the file types supported by your instrument, follow the instructions for logging on to the
network and then press the Upstream and Dnstream softkeys.
2.76
Thru Put

860 DSP.

SLM/Forward Input, then select the icon from
Thru Put

When logon is complete, the Thru Put Mode will be
displayed.
External RJ45 Port

instrument’s Ethernet Port, then select the Thru Put
icon
displayed.
2.77
Thru Put
Wi-Fi
instrument’s Ethernet Port, then select the icon
from the Installer Menu. The Select Wi-Fi Zone
window will appear. Select from the detected Wi-Fi
connections.
displayed.
Setting the Server IP

To set the Server IP use the buttons to highlight
Server IP, then enter the Server IP using the
Once set, the instrument will remember the IP.
2.78
Thru Put
Setting the Downstream File

When performing a downstream throughput test, the
instrument will download a file from the server. The
downstream file size should be approximately 1 MB.
To set the Downstream File use the buttons to
highlight Downstream File, then enter the file name
using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press the
button.
Running an Upstream Test

To run an upstream throughput test, press the Upstream
softkey, use the buttons to highlight the desired test
protocol, and then press the button. You may also
select the desired test protocol by pressing the
The instrument will display the progress of the upstream
file transfer on the bar graph.
When the test is complete, the instrument will display the
effective upstream data rate.
2.79
Thru Put
Running a Downstream Test

To run a downstream throughput test, press the Dnstream
softkey, use the buttons to highlight the desired test
protocol, and then press the button. You may also
select the desired test protocol by pressing the
The instrument will display the progress of the
downstream file transfer on the bar graph.
When the test is complete, the instrument will display the
effective downstream data rate.
Note: The test protocols UDP 15 through UDP 100 Mbps are only
available for DOCSIS 3.0 instruments that have the Ethernet Option
(CI-4 or CI-5) installed. This option provides a 100 Mbps network
connection. To view the installed functions on your instrument, see
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information
Mode. If you do not have Ethernet Option (CI-4 or CI-5) mode installed
in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this
option and start using it today.
2.80
Thru Put

Goto Ping / LPR

From Thru Put Mode you can jump to Ping Mode.
To change to Ping Mode, press the Goto softkey,
use the buttons to select Ping / LPR, and then
press the button. You may also select Ping / LPR
by pressing .
Once in Ping Mode, you may test the internal cable
modem as described in Chapter 7: Ping Mode of this
section of the manual. Pressing the button will
return you to Thru Put Mode.
Viewing Modem Information

To view internal modem information, press the Modem
softkey. Pressing the button will return you to Thru
Put Mode.
2.81
Thru Put

button while in the Thru Put Mode.
while in Thru Put Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Change HTTP Port
• Change TFTP Port
• Change UDP Port
• Display CPE IP

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.82
Thru Put
Change HTTP Port

This option is used to set the HTTP port that the
instrument uses to connect to the 860 DSPi High
Speed Throughput Test Suite.

buttons to highlight Change HTTP Port, and then
press the button. You may also select Change
HTTP Port by pressing .
Change HTTP Port window will open.
• Enter the port number using the alphanumeric
Note: If changing from the default port setting, a corresponding port

setting change must be made to the ACTS server.
2.83
Thru Put
Change TFTP Port

This option is used to set the TFTP port that the

buttons to highlight Change TFTP Port, and then
TFTP Port by pressing .
Change TFTP Port window will open.

2.84
Thru Put
Change UDP Port

This option is used to set the UDP port that the

buttons to highlight Change UDP Port, and then
UDP Port by pressing .
Change UDP Port window will open.

2.85
Thru Put
Display CPE IP
by pressing .
• To exit the Display CPE IP window press the
button.
2.86
Thru Put
Display IP
buttons to highlight Display IP, and then press the
button. You may also select Display IP by pressing
.
Display IP window will open.
• To exit the Display IP window, press the

button.
Note: Display IP is only shown when using an internal cable modem

connection.
2.87
BER 12. BER Mode 12

Introduction
In BER Mode the instrument can test the ratio of corrupted bits versus the total bits of data for a
selected channel. The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the BER Mode as a standard
feature. In order to use the BER Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with
QAM Option (QA-1).
You can also upgrade the BER Mode with the addition of the Enhanced Digital Video Retrofit
Option (IL-1 or IL-2). This option will provide deep interleave support for BER Mode on both the
860 DSP and 860 DSPi. This retrofit option is for instruments that were built before March 2005.
Any instruments built since this date are equipped with the IL-1 or IL-2 Retrofit Option as a
standard feature.
In BER Mode the instrument dwells on a particular channel, counting good bits and watching for
individual corrupted bits. The ratio of corrupted bits/total bits is the impulse BER.
of how to use BER Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Adjusting Channels
• Adjusting Time Scale
• Resetting BER Test
• Viewing Test Results
Note: BER Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP. To view the
Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information Mode. If you do not have
BER Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800)
344-2412 to order this option and start using it today.
chapter, go on-line to www.trilithic.com to update your firmware for free.
This will allow you to use all of the newest features that are included in
this mode. The QA-1 option is a paid upgrade to the 860 DSPi.
2.88
BER
Required Setup
To use BER Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
Adjusting Channels
To change the channel, use the buttons to highlight
the channel number, use the buttons to increment
the value up and down or enter the desired channel
number or frequency using the alphanumeric keypad,
Adjusting Time Scale

To change the time scale of the time graph, use the
buttons to highlight the time scale, use the
buttons to increment the value up and down.
2.89
BER

the Title Bar. To change the channel plan press the
Plan softkey. The Open File window will open. Use
the buttons to select the channel plan you
want from the list of channel plans available, and then
channel plan by pressing the corresponding
Resetting BER Test

To reset the BER Test press the Reset softkey. The
BER Test will reset the time measurement to zero
seconds and restart the BER Test.
2.90
BER
Viewing Test Results

The BER Mode presents bit error statistics as follows:
• The BER is expressed as the ratio of errored bits to total bits. This ratio is presented as a
single number in the form “3E-7” or “7E-6”. At the beginning of the test the BER is shown as
0E-0 then changes to show the BER as errored bits are accumulated in the course of the
test.
• Test results are given both as pre-FEC (before forward error correction) and post-FEC
(after forward error correction) values.
• Total errored and corrected, and errored and uncorrectable code words, expressed as
running totals.
• The running total of code words that were corrected using the FEC are displayed as
corr.
• The number of code words that were not capable of being corrected by the FEC are
displayed as uncor.
• Errored seconds and severely errored seconds, expressed as running totals.
• In this convention, BER is expressed as the number of seconds of data that contained
one or more bits that needed FEC correction.
• The successfully-repaired seconds are displayed as err sec.
• The seconds in which a bit was too damaged to repair are displayed as sev sec.
• Time graph
• Errored code words are displayed as marks on a horizontal line that expands across
the display, representing advancing time. The most recent events are shown on the right
side of the graph, the earliest events are on the left. The advantage of this convention is
that the displayed information is always meaningful regardless of the duration of the test
and the graphical display makes patterns of reoccurrence easy to detect. Corrected
code words per unit time are shown as light gray lines and uncorrectable code words
per unit time are shown as black lines.
• The X scale represents the number of seconds in the test.
• The Y scale represents the number of errors in each interval of the time represented by
the full X scale.
2.91
BER

button while in the BER Mode.
while in BER Mode and are described in Section I: The
Basics, Chapter 6: Basic Function Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
2.92
Web Test 13. Web Test Mode 13

Introduction
The Web Test Mode is used to test whether the instrument has an active internet connection. In
order to use the Web Test Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with Power
Pack Option (PP-1). In order to use the Web Test Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be
equipped with Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5).
of how to use Web Test Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Performing Web Test
Note: Web Test Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and
860 DSPi. To view the installed functions on your instrument, see
Mode. If you do not have Web Test Mode installed in your instrument,
you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start
using it today.
2.93
Web Test
Required Setup
To use Web Test Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use Web Test Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal cable
For more information on how to use the Web Browser Mode, see Chapter 14: Web Browser
Mode in this section of the manual.
Performing Web Test

When the Web Test Mode is activated, the instrument
will try to connect to the web page
http://my860dsp.com/confirm.
When the Web Test Mode successfully connects to this
web page, the web page will display Web
Connectivity...Pass.
When the Web Test Mode cannot successfully connect
to this web page, the web page will display a web page
error. If this occurs, check your connections settings and
try again.
2.94
Web Test

button while in the Web Test Mode.
while in Web Test Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Browser Refresh

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
Browser Refresh
This option is used to refresh the current web page.

buttons to highlight Browser Refresh, and then
press the button. You may also select Browser
Refresh by pressing .
2.95
WWW 14. Web Browser Mode 14

Introduction
In Web Browser Mode the instrument can access information from the Internet and connect with
web based applications such as work force management and status monitoring or to retrieve
information from technical databases. The Web Browser Mode can be used with a built in
modem or via an ethernet connection to an external modem or network.
In order to use the Web Browser Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with
Power Pack Option (PP-1). In order to use the Web Browser Mode on your 860 DSP, the
instrument must be equipped with Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5).
of using the Web Browser Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Browser Overview
• Browser Navigation
Note: Web Browser Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP

and 860 DSPi. To view the installed functions on your instrument, see
Mode. If you do not have Web Browser Mode installed in your
instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option
and start using it today.
2.96
WWW
Note: Since the web browser can be configured to point to any

website, in any country, it is possible to seize (lockup) the Web
Browser Mode. Trilithic has taken every precaution to prevent
browser problems, but there are still many features that a desktop
web browser can perform that an embedded browser will have
difficulties attempting to display. Please report any issues to Trilithic
Technical Support.
CAUTION: Should you have any difficulties or get locked-up while in

Web Browser Mode, hold down the and buttons at the same
time, for five seconds to force a reboot of your instrument.
Required Setup
To use Web Browser Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use Web Browser Mode with an internal cable modem, you will need to setup the internal
cable modem. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
To change the appearance of your browser screen by hiding or displaying status bars, you will
need to set up the browser settings; see Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
Setup Mode, Browser Settings.
The 860 DSP web browser is limited to accessing the web pages listed on its internal home page
(index.html) located on drive B.
You will need to use the WorkBench software to edit the index.html file. This will allow you to add or
change the web pages accessible from the home page. See your WorkBench operation manual
for further instructions.
2.97
WWW
Browser Overview
The web browser screen contains several tools which you should become familiar with before
using the web browser. Take a moment to locate the basic features of the web browser screen.
Title Bar
URL Bar
Main Display
Area
Status Bar
Softkey Bar
Title Bar
The title bar along the top of the screen indicates which screen is displayed, such as Web
Browser shown above.
URL Bar
The URL bar shows the URL of the current web page.
Main Display Area

The main display area, located below the URL bar, displays the web page being accessed.
Status Bar
Below the main display area is a black status bar. Single line text entries are displayed to
inform the user about the status of a web page.
Softkey Bar
Below the status bar, are four softkeys which correspond and identify the actions assigned to
the four yellow buttons on the keypad.
The softkeys are used to access various web browsing functions.
2.98
WWW
Browser Navigation
Selecting Links
Use the buttons to move between selectable fields on a web page.
Pressing the button will select a highlighted field.
Scrolling Web Pages

Use the <<Scroll and Scroll>> softkeys to scroll left and right on the web page.
Use the buttons to scroll up and down on the web page.
Entering Data
To enter numbers and text use the alphanumeric keypad.
Use the <<Char and Char>> softkeys to move the cursor left and right when entering or editing
text.
Use the button when finished entering text or the buttons to move to a new field.
2.99
WWW

button while in the Web Browser Mode.
while in Web Browser Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Browser Back
• Browser Forward
• Browser Refresh
• Browser Home
• Offline Browsing
• Clear Offline Cache

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
2.100
WWW
Browser Back
This option is used to move back one web page.

buttons to highlight Browser Back, and then press
the button. You may also select Browser Back by
pressing .
Browser Forward
This option is used to move forward one web page.

buttons to highlight Browser Forward, and then
Forward by pressing .
Browser Refresh
This option is used to refresh the current web page.

buttons to highlight Browser Refresh, and then
Refresh by pressing .
2.101
WWW
Browser Home
This option is used to go to the home web page.

buttons to highlight Browser Home, and then press
the button. You may also select Browser Home
by pressing .
Offline Browsing
You can save web pages for off-line browsing when
an internet connection is not available.
To use this option to save a web page for offline
browsing, press the button, use the buttons
to highlight Save for Offline, and then press the
button. You may also select Save for Offline by
pressing . The instrument will store the web page
and associated graphics on flash drive B.
To use this option to recall pages or graphics when
off-line, press the button, use the buttons to
highlight Recall Offline, and then press the button. You may also select Recall Offline by
pressing .
• The instrument will display a list of the cached web pages.
• Use the buttons to highlight a website in the cache.
• To view a highlighted selection, press the button.
Note: In order for links from one web page to another to work offline,
you must store the linked pages for offline browsing. If you try to
navigate to an uncached page, the instrument will display an error
message. Use the Browser Back function to return to the previous
page.
2.102
WWW
Clear Offline Cache

This option is used to the clear the offline cache of
web pages.

buttons to highlight Clear Offline Cache, and then
press the button. You may also select Clear
Offline Cache by pressing .
2.103
Auto Test 15. Auto Test Mode 15

Introduction
The Auto Test Mode performs a sequence of operations specified by a “macro”. You can
assemble Auto Test macros either manually or load them into the instrument using WorkBench
software. Each macro is a “script” that the instrument can follow. It may contain most of the
functions that the instrument is capable of performing, including channel selection, level setting,
measurements, comparisons to limits and data recording. A list of macros can be stored in your
instrument and you can select a macro for performing tests and generating reports at any time.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Auto Test Mode as a standard
feature.
In Auto Test Mode, the instrument displays the results of a test sequence which you can store in
the unit’s memory. Stored reports may be recalled using the Automatic Test Results Mode.
understanding of how to use Auto Test Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Creating Auto Test Macros
• Running Auto Test Macros
Required Setup
To use Auto Test Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
2.104
Auto Test
Creating Auto Test Macros

Auto Test macros can include up to 16 automated tests which the instrument can perform
immediately, at specific dates and times, or periodically starting at a specified date and time.
Create New Macro

To create a new Auto Test macro, press the
softkey.
• The Create a New Macro window will open.
• Enter the name of the new macro using the
button.
• The Edit Macro window will appear with Step
#1 of 16 selected. If Step #1 of 16 is not
selected, use the or softkeys to
select Step #1 of 16.
2.105
Auto Test
Selecting Type of Test

The default type of test Unused Step is displayed when creating a new macro.
To select the type of test desired, use the buttons to highlight the Step #X of 16
Field, use the buttons to select the type of test desired as follows;
Channel IP Schedule Test Test

Test Type Mode
Plan Address Type Parameters Limits
Unused Step N/A
Check All Levels SCAN X X X
Check Tilt (dB) TILT X X X
Check HUM (%) HUM X X X X
Check C/N (dB) C/N X X X
Check Depth of Mod

MOD X X X
(%)
Check QAM w/o

QAM X X X
Constellation
Check QAM plus

QAM X X X
Constellation
Check Ping PING X X X X
Check Throughput THRU PUT X X X X
Check Spectrum SPECTRUM X X X
Check VoIP RTP VoIP X X X X
Check Cable Modem CM STAT X X X
Check Leakage N/A X

If you wish to add another macro step, use the Next softkey to advance to the next step in
the auto test sequence. You can then define the step as described above. You may define up
to 16 steps in this manner.
Note: Macro test steps must be continuous. The instrument ends

execution of a macro on the first unused step.
Note: Leakage measurement requires the use of an external

leakage meter such as the Seeker Lite² or Seeker.
2.106
Auto Test
Selecting a Channel Plan

To select the channel plan, use the buttons to
highlight the Channel Plan field, and then use the
buttons to cycle through the channel plans
available on your instrument.
A brief summary of the selected Channel Plan will
be displayed in the Information field.
Note: Be sure to check that the channel plan you select has channels
designated for the type of test you are defining for this step. For
example, if you are defining a step as a Hum test, there must be at
least one channel designated for Hum.
Select an IP Address
To enter an IP address, use the buttons to
highlight the IP Address field, and then use the
alphanumeric keypad to enter the IP address, and
press the button.
2.107
Auto Test
Selecting a Schedule Type

The schedule type is used to control how and when
the instrument runs the macro. To select the schedule
type, use the buttons to highlight the
Schedule field, and then use the buttons to
cycle through the schedule types available.
• Immediate - Run the macro immediately.
• Interval / Count - Run the macro at a
selected date and time and repeating the
macro at regular time intervals.
• Specified Times - Run the macro at up to four
selected dates and times.
Note: You can change the schedule type at run time; however, setting
the default to the method you most commonly use will save time when
running the macro.
Setting Test Parameters

To set test parameters, use the Prv or Next softkey to highlight the desired test step and
then press the Params softkey.
After setting the test parameters, press the button to save the new parameters and return to
the Edit Macro window.
Check Hum (%) Test Parameters

When the test type is set to Check Hum (%), use
the buttons to highlight the following test
parameters, and then use the buttons to
cycle through the available options:
Hum Type - This sets the AC power frequency
used to measure power line related HUM. You
can select from 60 kHz, 120 kHz, or < 1 kHz
Value.
2.108
Auto Test
Check PING Test Parameters

When the test type is set to Check PING, use the
buttons to highlight the following test
parameters, and then use the buttons to
Packet Rate- This sets the time delay for the
signal to be converted into an IP packet. You can
select from 10 msec to 1000 msec, in 10 msec
increments.
Packet Size - This sets the size of the packet to
send for the test. You can select from 0, 32, 64,
256, 512, 768, or 1024 Bytes.
Packets to Send - This sets the number of packets to send for the test. You can select
from 100 Pkts to 100000 Pkts, in 100 Pkt increments.
Codec Delay - This sets the time delay for the codec compression. You can select from
0 msec to 300 msec, in 1 msec increments.
Jitter Buffer Delay - This sets the time delay for buffering packets. You can select from
0 msec to 300 msec, in 1 msec increments.
Check Throughput Test Parameters

When the test type is set to Check Throughput,
use the buttons to highlight the following
test parameters, and then use the buttons to
File Transfer - This sets the throughput file
transfer protocol. You can select from UDP, TFTP,
and HTTP Upstream Test and UDP, TFTP, and
HTTP Downstream Test.
Transfer Rate - This sets the data transfer rate
for the UDP Downstream Test. You can select
from 100 kBit/Sec to 40 MBit/Sec, in
100 kBit/Sec increments.
2.109
Auto Test
Check Spectrum Test Parameters

When the test type is set to Check Spectrum,
Start Frequency - This sets the start frequency
for the spectrum scan. This value cannot be
higher than the Stop Frequency.
Stop Frequency - This sets the stop frequency
for the spectrum scan. This value cannot be lower
than the Start Frequency.
Resolution Bandwidth - This sets the resolution bandwidth for the spectrum scan.
Detector Mode - This sets the type of detector mode to use. You can select from Avg
Detector, Dwell Wide Detector, or Dwell Narrow Detector.
Sampling Level - This sets the number of samples to use for the detector mode
averaging. You can select from Single Sample, 2 , 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 Samples.
Reference Level - This sets the reference level of the spectrum scan.
Hold Setting - This sets the time delay for buffering packets. You can select from None,
Max, or Min.
2.110
Auto Test
Check VoIP RTP Test Parameters

When the test type is set to Check VoIP RTP,
CODEC Type - This sets the type of CODEC.
This is set to G.711 64000 bps and cannot be
changed manually.
CODEC Delay - This sets CODEC delay. This is
tied to the CODEC Type and cannot be changed
manually.
Packet Rate - This sets the rate that packets are sent. You can choose from 20 msec to
250 msec, in 10 msec increments.
Packet Size - This sets set the size of packet. You can choose from 20 Bytes to
1000 Bytes.
Jitter Buffer Delay - This sets the jitter buffer to be used by voice receivers. You can
choose from 20 msec to 300 msec, in 10 msec increments.
Call Length - This sets the length of the call. The values to choose from are variable based
on the Packet Rate and Packet Size.
CAUTION: The instrument is set to perform the VoIP RTP test using the
G.711 64000 bps CODEC. The default values provided, should be
sufficient to perform any VoIP RTP test. If you choose to change the
default values, it may adversely affect your test results. When your
selected test settings do not conform to the CODEC, an asterisk will
appear in the CODEC Type field. Change VoIP RTP test settings at your
own risk.
2.111
Auto Test
Setting Test Limits

Setting test limits allows you to define the testing criteria that your system must satisfy. When
the instrument performs an Auto Test macro it will compare the measurement data to the test
limits that you have set.
Note: To meet a minimum limit the measured values must be equal to or

greater than the minimum limit. To meet a maximum limit the measured
values must be less than or equal to the maximum limit.
To set test parameters, use the Prv or Next softkey to highlight the desired test step and
then press the Limits softkey.
After setting the test limits, press the button to save the new limits and return to the Edit
Macro window.
Check All Levels Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check All Levels,
test settings, and then use the buttons to
change the value of the test settings:
Min Video - Sets the minimum limit for analog
video channel levels.
Max Video - Sets the maximum limit for analog
video channel levels.
Min V/A Delta - Sets the minimum allowable
video to audio level difference.
Max V/A Delta - Sets the maximum allowable video to audio level difference.
Min Digital Level - Sets the minimum limit for digital channel levels.
Max Digital Level - Sets the maximum limit for digital channel levels.
Max Delta Video - Sets the maximum difference allowed between the lowest and highest
levels measured for the analog video channels.
Max Delta Adj Video - Sets the maximum level variation between any two adjacent video
carriers.
2.112
Auto Test
Check Tilt (dB) Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Tilt (dB), use
settings, and then use the buttons to change
the value of the test settings:
Min Tilt - Sets minimum amplitude versus
frequency tilt your system must meet.
Max Tilt - Sets maximum amplitude versus
frequency tilt your system must not exceed.
Check Hum (%) Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Hum (%), use
Max Hum Percent - Sets the maximum hum level
your system must not exceed.
Check CN (dB) Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check CN (dB), use
Min Carrier to Noise - Sets minimum carrier to
noise level your system must meet.
2.113
Auto Test
Check Depth of Mod (%) Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Depth of
Mod (%), use the buttons to highlight the
following test settings, and then use the
buttons to change the value of the test settings:
Min Percent Mod - Sets minimum depth of
modulation percentage your system must meet.
Max Percent Mod - Sets maximum depth of
modulation percentage your system must not
exceed.
Check QAM w/o Constellation Test

Limits
When the test type is set to Check QAM w/o
Constellation, use the buttons to highlight
the following test settings, and then use the
Min Digital Level - Sets the minimum limit for
digital channel levels.
Max Digital Level - Sets the maximum limit for
Min Digital MER - Sets the minimum digital MER
your system must meet.
Max Digital EVM - Sets the maximum digital EVM your system must not exceed.
Max Digital Pre BER - Sets the maximum digital pre BER your system must meet.
Max Digital Post BER - Sets the maximum digital post BER your system must not
exceed.
Note: Setting Min Digital MER, Max Digital EVM, Max Digital Pre
BER, or Max Digital Post BER to zero disables the limit test.
Note: The higher that you set the MER / BER limits, the more time the
MER / BER test will take.
2.114
Auto Test
Check QAM plus Constellation Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check QAM plus
Constellation, use the buttons to highlight
the following test settings, and then use the
Min Digital Level - Sets the minimum limit for
Max Digital Level - Sets the maximum limit for
Min Digital MER - Sets the minimum digital MER
Max Digital EVM - Sets the maximum digital EVM your system must not exceed.
Max Digital Pre BER - Sets the maximum digital pre BER your system must meet.
Max Digital Post BER - Sets the maximum digital post BER your system must not
exceed.
Check PING Test Limits
When the test type is set to Check PING, use the
buttons to highlight the following test
Min Launch Level - Sets the minimum launch
level that your cable modem must meet.
Max Launch Level - Sets the maximum launch
level that your cable modem must not exceed.
Max Lost Packets - Sets the maximum number
of lost packets that your system must not exceed.
Max Percent Lost - Sets the maximum percent of lost packets your system must not
exceed.
Max Transit Time - Sets the maximum transmit time your system must not exceed.
Max Latency - Sets the maximum latency your system must not exceed.
Max Jitter - Sets the maximum jitter your system must not exceed.
2.115
Auto Test
Check Throughput Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Throughput,
Min Transfer Rate - Sets the minimum
throughput transfer rate that your system must
meet.
Check Spectrum Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Spectrum,
Min Level - Sets the minimum level that your
system must meet. This measurement is useful for
checking for a dead laser.
Max Level - Sets the maximum level that your
system must not exceed.
Check VoIP RTP Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check VoIP RTP,
Maximum Latency - Sets the maximum latency
that your system must not exceed.
Maximum Jitter - Sets the maximum jitter that
Minimum MOS - Sets the minimum MOS that
2.116
Auto Test
Check Cable Modem Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Cable
Modem, use the buttons to highlight the
following test settings, and then use the
Min Launch Level - Sets the minimum launch
Max Launch Level - Sets the maximum launch
level that your cable modem must not exceed.
Min Receive Level - Sets the minimum receive
Max Receive Level - Sets the maximum receive level that your cable modem must not
exceed.
Check Leakage Test Limits

When the test type is set to Check Leakage, use
Max Level - Sets the maximum leakage level that
2.117
Auto Test
Saving Macros
After completing the setup of an Auto Test macro,
press the button, use the buttons to select
Yes to save the macro or No to exit without saving,
and select the button. The instrument will return to
the Auto Test Macros window.
Copying Macros
To copy or create a macro similar to an existing
macro, use the buttons to highlight the macro
that you wish to copy, and select the Copy softkey.
The Copy a Macro window will appear; enter a new
file name using the alphanumeric keypad, and select
the button.
Deleting Macros
To delete an existing macro, use the buttons to
highlight the macro that you wish to delete, and select
the Delete softkey. The Delete Selected File?
window will appear; use the buttons to select
Yes to delete the macro or No to exit without
deleting, and select the button.
2.118
Auto Test
Running Auto Test Macros

To run an Auto Test macro, highlight the macro name on the Auto Test Macros window, and then
start the selected macro by pressing the Start softkey.
Immediate Execution
If the Schedule field is set to Immediate the macro
will execute immediately.
The instrument will display the progress of the macro
along with the Pass or Fail status for each step.
Note: You can abort a macro in progress by pressing the button

when the Auto Test Results window is shown.
When the macro finishes execution, the Save Data

As window will appear; use the alphanumeric keypad
to enter the file name, and then press the button.
Note: When the macro is complete, the instrument will save a data log
that includes all of the data collected during the test.
2.119
Auto Test
Interval / Count Execution

If the Schedule Field is set to Interval / Count the
Save Macro Data window will appear; use the
alphanumeric keypad to enter the file name, and then
press the button.
The Timing/Schedule window will appear.
2.120
Auto Test
Start Date and Time

To set the macro start date and time from the
Timing/Schedule window, use the
buttons to highlight the Start Time Field,
and press the button.
• The Enter Current Date window will
appear. Use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the current date, and press the
button.
• The Enter Start Time window will appear.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the
current date, and press the button.
Note: The clock display on the instrument stops when the Enter Current
Date and Enter Start Time windows are open.
2.121
Auto Test
Test Interval
To set the macro test interval, use the
buttons to highlight the Test Interval Field, and
use the buttons to change the test interval
value.
Number of Tests
To set the number of test, use the buttons
to highlight the Number of Tests Field, and use
the buttons to change the number of tests.
2.122
Auto Test
Test Execution
When you have completed setting up the macro
schedule, press the button. The instrument will
begin running the macro. The instrument will
display the Auto Test Results window briefly,
and then the instrument will go into low power
mode.
Forty-five seconds before a timed event is
scheduled to occur, the instrument will exit low
power mode and the instrument will display the
Auto Test Results window.
macro along with the Pass or Fail status for each step.

You can power up the instrument while it is in low power mode by pressing the button.
The instrument will display Auto Test In Progress in the title bar.
The instrument will display the next macro start time in the message bar at the bottom of
the screen.
CAUTION: You may leave the instrument on or turn it off and the Auto
Test Macro will continue. Pressing any other key will abort the macro in
progress.
2.123
Auto Test
Specified Times Execution

If the Schedule Field is set to Specified Times the
Save Macro Data window will appear; use the
alphanumeric keypad to enter the file name, and then
press the button.
The Table Schedule window will appear.
2.124
Auto Test
Start Date and Time

To set the macro start date and time from the
Table Schedule window, use the buttons
to highlight the unused test time, and press the
button.
• The Enter Current Date window will
appear. Use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the current date, and press the
button.
• The Enter Start Time window will appear.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the
start time, and press the button.
Note: The clock display on the instrument stops when the Enter Current
Date and Enter Start Time windows are open.
2.125
Auto Test
Test Execution
When you have completed setting up the macro
schedule, press the button. The instrument will
begin running the macro. The instrument will
display the Auto Test Results window briefly,
and then the instrument will go into low power
mode.
Forty-five seconds before a timed event is
scheduled to occur, the instrument will exit low
power mode and the instrument will display the
Auto Test Results window.
macro along with the Pass or Fail status for each step.

You can power up the instrument while it is in low power mode by pressing the button.
The instrument will display Auto Test In Progress in the title bar.
The instrument will display the next macro start time in the message bar at the bottom of
the screen.
CAUTION: You may leave the instrument on or turn it off and the Auto
Test Macro will continue. Pressing any other key will abort the macro in
progress.
2.126
Auto Test

button while in the Auto Test Mode.
while in Auto Test Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
2.127
Results
Auto Test 16. Auto Test Results Mode 16

Introduction
The instrument can store the results of an Auto Test macro in its memory. Stored reports may be
recalled using the Auto Test Results Mode. If you have just completed an Immediate Auto Test
macro, the Auto Test Results Mode will appear and the test results will be displayed.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Auto Test Results Mode as a
standard feature.
understanding of how to use Auto Test Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Viewing Auto Test Results
Required Setup
To use Auto Test Results Mode, you are not required to perform any setup procedures.
2.128
Results
Auto Test
Viewing Auto Test Results

To review the results of an Interval / Count or Specified
Times Auto Test macro press the Load softkey. The
Open File window will appear.
Use the buttons to highlight the desired file

and press the button.
The instrument will display a list of each Auto Test

macro step plus the results of the corresponding step.
To view the details of an Auto Test macro step, use the
buttons to highlight the desired test step and press
button.
If the results occupy more than one screen, use the

button to scroll through the results.
Press the button to return to the Auto Test Results
window.
2.129
860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Cable Analyzer
Section III: Service Functions

1. Service Functions Overview 1

Introduction
The instrument enables you to select from numerous testing and measurement procedures. The
instruments features several service functions which come with the instruments and may have one
or more optional functions.
This section will provide you with instructions on how to utilize the functions available in the
Service Menu of the instrument:
may be customized and therefore may differ from the Service Menu
860 DSP 860 DSPi

Mode Description
Option Option
Displays the amplitude of the 50/60 Hz,

Hum 100/120 Hz, and low frequency interference present Standard PP-1
Hum on the video carrier of a single selected channel.
C/N
Displays the ratio of the amplitudes of the visual
Carrier-to- carrier and the noise within a single selected Standard PP-1
Noise Ratio channel.
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Section III: Service Functions
3.2
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
MOD
Displays the percentage of video modulation for
Standard PP-1
Depth of the visual carrier of a single, selected channel.
Modulation
Measures the amplitude of two common

intermodulation products, Composite Second
Order and Composite Triple Beat present within a
CSO/CTB selected analog video channel. This feature also Standard PP-1
CSO / CTB allows a user to measure CSO/CTB on an Analog
(NTSC) Cable TV Channel without removing the
carrier and disrupting service.
Displays the amplitudes of all visual and aural

Scan
carriers in the selected channel plan as two
Standard PP-1
Channel Plan simultaneous line graphs or as a bar graph; also
Scan displays total power measurement.
Displays the current and maximum FM deviation on

FM DEV Standard PP-1
the audio carrier of a single, selected channel.
FM Deviation
Used to test and set the tilt and gain of distribution

amplifiers and detect faults in the system that affect
Sweep
these parameters.
Sweepless Standard PP-1
Sweep® /
Forward Note: The 8300 FST is no longer supported.
SpeedSweep
Performs all of the Sweepless Sweep features plus

Sweep
it provides compatibility with the 8300 FST. This
Forward will allow the Forward SpeedSweep Mode to test FS-1 FS-1
SpeedSweep the tilt and gain of un-used frequency bands that
are not in the users channel lineup.
3.3
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
This test allows you to maintain your reverse

PP-1 and
SSR
spectrum by performing reverse band frequency SR-1
SR-1
flatness sweeps and return band ingress analysis.
Return Test
RSA
This test allows you to test your return path for PP-1 and
SR-1
micro-reflections and suck-outs. SR-1
Return
Sweep
This test allows you to test your return band for

RSVP
PP-1 and
cable modem launch levels and return band carrier- VP-1
VP-1
Return to-ingress measurements.
Installation
Analyzes and displays the signal qualities of
Vestigial Sideband Modulation (VSB) signals
displayed using constellation, equalizer tap VSB and VSB and
VSB diagram, and BER graph. This feature also IL-1 or IL-2 IL-1 or IL-2
displays the signal level and numeric values for
VSB MER and pre/post FEC BER.
Analyzes the signal qualities of Vertical Interval Test
Signals (VITS) to measure in-channel response,
VITS
differential phase, differential gain, and chroma VITS VITS
delay. This feature also displays the test signal
VITS itself.
Allows the operator to tune the meter to a
downstream QAM channel and display its Error
PP-1 and
QAM EVS
Vector Spectrum (EVS), to reveal noise and QA-1
QA-2
ingress that may be present under the QAM
QAM EVS channel.
Provides a way to troubleshoot ingress and noise

problems within active channel bands by seeing the PP-1 and
Traffic
TC-1
ingress that is present "underneath" an upstream TC-1
TraffiControl cable modem channel, or any bursty signal.
3.4
and Hardware.
To use some Installer Functions, you may have to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you
have completed Section I: The Basics, Chapter 5: Initial Setup before proceeding through this
section.
To use some Service Functions you will need to connect your instrument to your cable system.
3.5
Hum 2. Hum Mode 2

Introduction
In Hum Mode the instrument displays the amplitude of the 50/60 Hz, 100/120 Hz, and low
frequency (<1KHz) interference present on the video carrier of a single selected channel. In Hum
Mode the instrument displays the selected channel number and the amplitudes of hum and low
frequency interference as individual percentages. Hum Mode requires a minimum signal level of
-20 dBmV. The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the Hum Mode as a standard feature. In
order to use the Hum Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with Power Pack
Option (PP-1).
of how to use Hum Mode including:
• Required Setup
Note: Hum Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view the
have Hum Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at
3.6
Hum
Required Setup
To use Hum Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use Hum Mode, you will need to setup the line frequency Hum Type (50/60 Hz). Be sure you
have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Level Mode
Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
For SECAM L channels, you will need to set the Optimal Modulation. See Section IV: Setup
Adjusting Channels
number using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press
the button.
channel is not designated as analog in your plan or the
channel is scrambled, the message Hum Not Available
will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen and the instrument will beep.

the title bar. To change the channel plan press the
Plan softkey. The Open File window will open. Use
the buttons to select the channel plan you
want from the list of channel plans available, and then
press the button.
The instrument will tune to the channels defined as
analog in your channel plan.
3.7
Hum

Goto Spectrum
From Hum Mode you can jump to Spectrum Mode
to display the current channel.
analyzer settings as described in Section II:
Installer Functions, Chapter 4: Spectrum Mode.
Pressing the button will return you to Hum Mode
3.8
Hum
Goto Scan
use the buttons to select Scan , and then press
.
return to Hum Mode tuned to the new channel.
3.9
Hum

button while in the Hum Mode.
while in Hum Mode and are described in Section I: The
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.10
C/N 3. C/N Mode 3

Introduction
In C/N Mode the instrument displays the ratio of the amplitudes of the visual carrier and the noise
within a single, selected channel. In C/N Mode the instrument displays the selected channel
number, frequency, and the amplitudes of the visual carrier, the bandwidth-corrected noise and the
ratio of the two measurements. C/N Mode requires a minimum signal level greater than 5 dBmV.
The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the C/N Mode as a standard feature. In order to use the
C/N Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with Power Pack Option (PP-1).
of how to use C/N Mode including:
• Required Setup
Note: C/N Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view the
have C/N Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at
3.11
C/N
Required Setup
To use C/N Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use C/N Mode, you will need to set the Analog Noise BW used when computing the C/N for
analog TV channels. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2:
Instrument Setup Mode, Measurement Settings before proceeding through this chapter.

buttons.

3.12
C/N
Adjusting Channels
the button.
channel is scrambled, the message C/N Not Available

button.
3.13
C/N

Goto Spectrum
From C/N Mode you can jump to Spectrum Mode
to display the current channel.
Pressing the button will return you to C/N Mode at
the originally selected channel.
3.14
C/N
Goto Scan
use the buttons to select Scan, and then press
.
return to C/N Mode tuned to the new channel.
3.15
C/N

button while in the C/N Mode.
while in C/N Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Auto Range Option

Range by pressing .
3.16
C/N

added to all measurements made in C/N Mode.
the button.
button.
close and the C/N Mode will display the
number.
3.17
MOD 4. Mod Mode 4

Introduction
In Mod Mode the instrument displays the percentage of video modulation for the visual carrier of a
single, user-selected channel. In Mod Mode the instrument displays the selected channel number,
frequency, and the video modulation depth as a percentage, both numerically and as a bar graph.
This mode can also be toggled to a mode that allows the user to hear the demodulated aural
content through the instrument’s built-in speaker. The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the
Mod Mode as a standard feature. In order to use the Mod Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument
must be equipped with Power Pack Option (PP-1).
of how to use Mod Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Using the Audio Function
Note: Mod Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view the
have Mod Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at
3.18
MOD
Required Setup
To use Mod Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
Adjusting Channels
the button.
channel is scrambled, the message Depth of
Modulation Not Available will be displayed in the status
bar at the bottom of the screen and the instrument will
beep.

button.
3.19
MOD
Using the Audio Function

The Audio softkey allows you hear the audio (AM or
FM) on analog video channels. You can toggle the audio
feature on and off by pressing the Audio softkey. When
the audio feature is on, the AUDIO ON icon will be
displayed in the lower right portion of the screen and the
% depth of modulation measurement will be paused.
To adjust the volume use the Vol Up or Vol Down softkey.
The current volume will be displayed in the status bar at
the bottom of the screen.

button while in the Mod Mode.
while in Mod Mode and are described in Section I: The
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.20
CSO/CTB 5. CSO/CTB Mode 5
Introduction
In CSO/CTB Mode the instrument measures the amplitude of two common intermodulation
products, composite second order and composite triple beat present within a selected analog
video channel. This mode requires two measurements; the in-channel energy while the video
carrier is present and the residual energy when the carrier is switched off. To ensure full
measurement range, the CSO/CTB measurement should be performed with a carrier level greater
than 0 dBmV. The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the CSO/CTB Mode as a standard
feature. In order to use the CSO/CTB Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped
with Power Pack Option (PP-1).
of how to use CSO/CTB Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Measuring CSO/CTB
Note: CSO/CTB Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To

have CSO/CTB Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
3.21
CSO/CTB
Required Setup
To use CSO/CTB Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use CSO/CTB Mode, you will need to set up the CSO/CTB Mode. Be sure you have
completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, CSO/CTB
Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
Note: In order to properly measure CSO/CTB you will need signal

levels of at least 0 dBmV. For best results you may need to add a
channel filter in line with the instrument. When using a filter make
certain the filter has sufficient bandwidth to include the carrier and
CSO/CTB.
Adjusting Channels
the button.
channel is scrambled, the message CSO/CTB Not
Available will be displayed in the status bar at the
bottom of the screen and the instrument will beep.
3.22
CSO/CTB

button.
Measuring CSO/CTB
The instrument can perform CSO/CTB calculations using one of the following two methods:
• Method #1 - This method involves taking a reference trace, removing the channel, and
looking at the spectrum beneath the channel.
• Method #2 - This method involves using a line blanker and looking at the spectrum
beneath the channel during the blanked line.
Note: In general, worst-case CSO products appear at the lowest and

highest frequency channels while worst-case CTB products tend to
appear at the mid-frequency channels.
3.23
CSO/CTB
Method #1
Once you have selected the desired channel, the instrument will display the peak video carrier
level.
To measure CSO/CTB you must remove the selected
channel for a short period of time in order to see what
signal lies underneath the chosen frequencies. This
should be done under strict conditions as to not affect
the cable subscribers.
When the carrier has been removed, it will measure
and display CSO and CTB. The CSO/CTB values for
the five selected frequencies from setup are
displayed below the channel.
A detailed list of CSO/CTB components is displayed
in tabular form at the lower left of the screen. The instrument will hold the CSO/CTB readings
after you turn the carrier back on.
Note: If your meter is equipped with the Advanced CSO/CTB option,

you must set the Line number to zero (Line N/A will be displayed) in
order to use Method #1.
Note: For additional information about this measurement, refer to the

860 DSPi CSO/CTB application note, available on Trilithic’s website
at www.trilithic.com, in the Broadband Instruments, Downloads,
Application Notes section.
3.24
CSO/CTB
Method #2
Once you have selected the desired channel, the
instrument will display the peak video carrier level.
To measure CSO/CTB this method requires the use
of a line blanker. Once you have installed your line
blanker and chosen a line number to blank perform
the following steps;
• Use the buttons to highlight Line, and
then use the buttons to choose your line
number or use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the desired line number and then press
the button.
• Use the buttons to highlight Even/Odd, and then use the buttons to select
either Even or Odd.
• The meter will automatically look at the selected channel during the blanked line for
CSO and CTB carriers.
The CSO/CTB values for the five selected frequencies from setup are displayed below the
channel.
A detailed list of CSO/CTB components is displayed in tabular form at the lower left of the
screen. The instrument will hold the CSO/CTB readings after you turn the carrier back on.
3.25
CSO/CTB

button while in the CSO/CTB Mode.
while in CSO/CTB Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.26
CSO/CTB

added to all measurements made in CSO/CTB
Mode.
the button.
button.
close and the CSO/CTB Mode will display the
compensation value below the graph.
3.27
Scan 6. Scan Mode 6

Introduction
In Scan Mode the instrument displays the amplitudes of all visual and aural carriers in the selected
channel plan as two simultaneous line graphs or as a bar graph. The amplitudes of the visual and
aural carriers, and their difference, are displayed for the channel currently selected by the variable
marker. The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the Scan Mode as a standard feature. In order
to use the Scan Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with Power Pack
Option (PP-1).
of how to use Scan Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Scan Limit Set and Viewing Limits
Note: Scan Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view

have Scan Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at
3.28
Scan
Required Setup
To use Scan Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use Scan Mode, you will need to set up the Scan Mode. Be sure you have completed Section
IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Scan Mode Settings before

On the graph, vertical displacement represents signal
strength. The amplitude represented by the top horizontal
line on the graph is the reference level.
buttons.

3.29
Scan
Adjusting Channels
the button.

button.
3.30
Scan
Setting Scan Limit Set and Viewing Limits

The instrument can analyze a channel scan according to
one of four scan limit sets named Tap, Block, Set, and
User. By selecting the appropriate scan limit set, the
instrument will instantly inform you of out of tolerance
readings.
To select the scan limit set, press the Drop softkey, use
the buttons to select the scan limit set from the list
of scan limit set options, and then press the button.
You may also select the desired scan limit set option by
pressing the corresponding alphanumeric button.
To view the details of a current scan limit set, press the
Limits softkey. To view details of a specific limit, use the
buttons to highlight the desired limit, and then
press the button. The Scan Information window will
appear. Pressing the or button will return you to
Scan Mode. An asterisk (*) next to the limit indicates that
the limit has failed.
To see a list of channels not meeting limits, press the
Limits softkey, use the buttons to highlight Scan
Information, and press the button. To page through
the scan results, press the button. The Scan
Information window will appear. Pressing the or
button will return you to Scan Mode.
Note: To set the test limits of a scan limit set, see Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Scan Mode Settings.
3.31
Scan

Goto Level
From Scan Mode you can jump to Level Mode with
the channel automatically set to display the current
channel.
To change to Level Mode, press the Goto softkey,
use the buttons to select Level, and then press
the button. You may also select Level by pressing
.
Pressing the button will return you to Scan Mode
3.32
Scan
Goto Spectrum
From Scan Mode you can jump to Spectrum Mode
to display the current channel or frequency.
Pressing the button will return you to Scan Mode
3.33
Scan

You can toggle the display between a line graph and a
bar graph.
buttons to highlight Change Display Mode, and
In the bar graph display the instrument lists the levels for
all Scan channels.
3.34
Scan

button while in the Scan Mode.
while in Scan Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log
• Turn Averaging On/Off


Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.35
Scan
Auto Range Option

Range by pressing .
Turn Averaging On/Off

This option is used to enable and disable the sweep
averaging function. When active, this function
averages the values of several consecutive sweeps
to reduce display jitter.
buttons to highlight Turn Averaging On/Off,
Turn Averaging On/Off by pressing .
To adjust the number of scans in an average, see
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2:
INSTRUMENT SETUP Mode, Forward Sweep Settings.
3.36
Scan

added to all measurements made in Scan Mode.
the button.
button.
close and the Scan Mode will display the
compensation value below the graph.
3.37
FM DEV 7. FM Dev Mode 7
Introduction
In FM Dev Mode the instrument displays the current and maximum FM deviation on the audio
carrier of a single user-selected channel. In FM Dev Mode the instrument displays the selected
channel number, the current FM deviation, and the maximum detected FM deviation, both
numerically and as a bar graph. The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the FM Dev Mode as
a standard feature. In order to use the FM Dev Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be
equipped with Power Pack Option (PP-1).
of how to use FM Dev Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Using the Audio Function
Note: FM Dev Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view

have FM Dev Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic
Required Setup
To use FM Dev Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
3.38
FM DEV
Adjusting Channels
the button.
channel is scrambled, the message FM Deviation Not
Available will be displayed in the status bar at the
bottom of the screen and the instrument will beep.
Note: Press the Reset softkey to reset the displayed peak/max hold.

button.
Setting Volume Level

To adjust the volume use the Vol Up or Vol Down softkey. The current volume will be displayed in the
status bar at the bottom of the screen.
3.39
FM DEV

button while in the FM Dev Mode.
while in FM Dev Mode, and are described in Section I:
The Basics, Chapter 6: Basic Function Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.40
Sweep 8. Sweep Mode 8

Introduction
The Sweep Mode is used to test and set the tilt and gain of distribution amplifiers and detect
faults in the system that affect these parameters.
The instrument uses the carriers already being carried by the HFC distribution system or a
dedicated sweep transmitter in the head end. The instrument compensates for differences in the
amplitudes of the carriers by comparing two sweeps, a reference and a test. You perform the
reference sweep at some starting point in the coaxial plant, usually the node for the service area to
be swept, and save the scan in the instrument.
The sweep process is based on the unity gain principle that applies to the coaxial design of the
HFC network. This means that each amplifier output test point will ideally have the same output
level characteristics. The sweep uses comparison to a stored reference (typically the node or first
active component of the network). If the successive amplifiers are operating according to the
designed unity gain principle, the response will be very close to that of the stored reference.
When ther is damage, loose connections, or adjustment is required, the display response will
deviate from the ideal “flat” response.
The 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with two different versions of the Sweep Mode as
follows:
• Carrier-Referenced Sweep Mode - The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with this mode
as the standard Sweep Mode. This mode is use to test and set the tilt and gain of
distribution amplifiers and detect faults in the system that affect these parameters. The 860
DSPi can be upgraded to this mode by purchasing the Power Pack Option (PP-1).
• Forward SpeedSweep Mode - The 860 DSP and 860 DSPi can be upgraded to this
mode by purchasing the Forward SpeedSweep Option (FS-1). This mode includes all of
the Carrier-Referenced Sweep Mode features plus it provides compatibility with the
8300 FST, however the Forward SpeedSweep Mode does not require the 8300 FST.
This will allow the Forward SpeedSweep Mode to test the tilt and gain including unused
frequency bands that are not in the users channel lineup.
Note: To view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section

IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information Mode. If you
do not have Sweepless Sweep Mode or Forward SpeedSweep
Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-
2412 to order these options and start using them today.
3.41
Sweep

understanding of how to use Sweep Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Averaging Type
• Setting Test Point Profile
• Setting TAP Offset Value
• Marker Settings
• Capturing a Reference Scan
• Sweeping an Amplifier
Required Setup
To use Sweep Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use Sweep Mode, you will need to set up the Sweep Mode. Be sure you have completed
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Fwd Sweep Settings before
3.42
Sweep

buttons.
Setting Averaging Type

To set the averaging type, use the buttons to
highlight Avg and then use the buttons to set the
averaging type to Avg Off, Avg Low, Avg Med, and Avg
High as desired.
Note: Higher averaging is recommended when setting a reference to

ensure optimal performance when sweeping.
3.43
Sweep


button.
3.44
Setting Test Point Profile
The TP sets the name of the test point profile which is
used for comparison of sweep signals. To change the
test point profile, use the buttons to highlight TP
and then use the buttons to set the test point profile
to Manual or Test Point 1 through Test Point 9 as
desired.
To use a Test Point Profile, the profile parameters will
have to be entered as described in Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, FWD
Sweep Settings.
Setting TAP Offset Value

The TAP sets the offset value of the TAP. To change the
offset, use the buttons to highlight TAP and then
use the buttons to set the TAP value to the desired
value.
Setting Low Gain

The Lo sets the lower gain limit. To change the low gain,
use the buttons to highlight Lo and then use the
buttons to set the low gain to the desired value.
3.45
Sweep
Setting High Gain

The Hi sets the upper gain limit. To change the high
gain, use the buttons to highlight Hi and then use
the buttons to set the high gain to the desired
value.
Marker Settings
The instrument displays two frequency-settable markers
as dark vertical lines on the scale. These markers can
be used to make amplitude measurements of carriers at
user-selected frequencies, or to determine the difference
(Delta) in amplitude between two selected carriers.
To set a marker to a frequency, use the buttons to
highlight Marker A or Marker B, then increment the
buttons. You can also enter a frequency directly using the
3.46
Sweep
Capturing a Reference Scan

The reference scan will be used to remove measurement errors caused by variations in carrier
amplitudes. In most cases, the reference scan will be taken at the node for the service area you
will be sweeping. For convenience, the instrument can store up to 12 independent sweep
references.
To capture a reference scan, connect the instrument to the node output test point, use the
buttons to highlight TP and then use the buttons to set the test point profile.
You should now see a scan of the carriers present at the test point, with a shaded line across the
screen representing the desired carrier amplitudes.
Note: If you do not see this display, adjust the reference level to bring
the scan on-screen.
Use the markers to adjust the amplifier gain and tilt pads
to bring the node to nominal performance.
To save the displayed scan as a reference scan, press
the Save Ref softkey and use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the desired reference name, and press the
button. The current scan has now been saved with the
selected reference scan name for use as a reference
when sweeping amplifiers.
3.47
Sweep
Sweeping an Amplifier
The process for sweeping an amplifier is very similar to
that used to create a reference scan.
To sweep an amplifier, connect the instrument to the
node output test point, use the buttons to highlight
TP Manual and then use the buttons to set the TP
Test Point (1 thru 9) profile for this type of amplifier
installation.
the scan on-screen.
Press the Use Ref softkey, use the buttons to highlight the reference file for the node that
serves this area, and press the button.
The instrument now displays a line graph representing
the gain and tilt performance of the amplifier. When the
amplifier is properly aligned, the trace will coincide with
the center (fourth from the bottom) horizontal line of the
graph’s grid.
While using a reference, the Ref and TAP settings are
automatically adjusted to position the trace at the
appropriate point in the graph, and are not manually
adjustable.
To stop using the reference function, press the Use Ref
softkey, use the buttons to highlight No Ref, and
press the button.
3.48
Sweep

You can toggle the display between a line graph and
a bar graph.
buttons to highlight Change Display Mode,
Change Display Mode by pressing .
When Taking Reference

When taking a reference sweep, the instrument
highlights the difference between the active video
and audio signals.
When Using Reference

When using a reference sweep, the instrument
displays the sweep response with the area below the
trace “filled-in.”
3.49
Sweep

button while in the Sweep Mode.
while in Sweep Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Auto Range
• Save Data Log
• Distance to Fault
• 8300 FST Channel On/Off


Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.50
Sweep
Auto Range Option

Range by pressing .
Distance to Fault Option

This option is used to calculate the distance to a fault.
buttons to highlight Distance to Fault, and then
press the button. You may also select Distance
to Fault by pressing . The distance to fault value
will be displayed in the status bar.
To accurately use the Distance to Fault Option, you
will need to setup the cable velocity factor in Section
IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup
Mode, Forward Sweep Settings.
3.51
Sweep
Use 8300 FST

This option is used to enable and disable the use of
8300 FST channels.
buttons to highlight Use 8300 FST, and then
press the button. You may also select Use 8300
FST by pressing .
3.52
SSR 9. SSR Mode 9

Introduction
SSR Mode equips the instrument with the return maintenance functions of a Trilithic Guardian
SSR reverse field unit including:
• Reverse path sweep graphing the response of 8 individually-settable reverse test carriers,
as measured in the hub and transmitted to the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
• Reverse gain and tilt, calculated from the reverse test carriers used in the sweep display.
• Reverse spectrum view, showing a spectrum plot of the reverse band as scanned in the
hub and transmitted to the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
SSR Mode also equips your instrument with some additional features not available in the Trilithic
Guardian SSR field unit including:
• Simultaneous display of both the sweep trace and the reverse spectrum, as scanned in the
hub.
• Variable markers that simplify the direct measurement of ingress and traffic amplitudes.
• A compare function that simultaneously displays the reverse spectrum as measured at the
hub by the SST and the reverse spectrum measured locally by the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
This function is especially useful for determining if the disrupting ingress detected by the
SST is coming from the leg of the system to which the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi is currently
connected.
In order to use the SSR Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Return
Sweep Receiver Option (SR-1). In order to use the SSR Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument
must be equipped with Power Pack Option (PP-1) and Return Sweep Receiver Option (SR-1).
Note: SSR Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860
DSPi. To view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section
do not have SSR Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
3.53
SSR

understanding of how to use SSR Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Using the SSR Mode
• Adjusting Node
• Adjusting Tx Level
• Using Variable Markers
• Using the Compare Function
• Saving a Reference Scan
• Using a Reference Scan
• Viewing the Tx Frequencies
• Adjusting Rx Link Level
3.54
SSR
Required Setup
To use SSR Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use SSR Mode, you will need to set up the SSR Mode. Be sure you have completed Section
IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, SSR Mode Settings before
To use SSR Mode with Auto Link with a 9581 SST R4 in Normal Mode, you will need to set up the
return link parameters. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2:
Instrument Setup Mode, Ret Link Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
Note: To use SSR Mode, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi must be in
communication with a Trilithic Guardian 9580 SST (0.3 Mhz – 42 MHz)
or 9581 SST (0.3 – 65 MHz) reverse analyzer located in the hub. SSTs
are digitizers which analyze test signals from the 860 DSP or 860
DSPi and scan the reverse spectrum, measuring traffic and ingress.
Data collected by the SST is transmitted on a downstream data carrier
to instruments in the field for use in reverse path quality calculations.
3.55
SSR
Using the SSR Mode

The SSR Mode transmits a set of up to eight reverse test carriers to the SST in the hub for
analysis. The frequencies for the carriers are set at the hub, but if you know that one of these
carriers will interfere with return services in a particular part of your system you may selectively turn
that carrier off.
Reverse sweeping is used to adjust the gain and tilt of reverse distribution amplifiers. When
adjusted, test signals injected into any amplifier’s reverse test point at a particular level will arrive
in the hub at a desired level. To perform the adjustments you must know the injection level
specified for the reverse amplifier modules and the insertion loss of the test point you will be
connecting to.
Note: For more information on SST/SSR setup and sweeping see

the 9580 SST or 9581 SST operation manual.
Note: The Guardian SST in the hub that will be receiving and
evaluating the upstream test signals must also be set to the
appropriate reference level before you begin your RSVP tests. If the
SST is set to the wrong reference level inaccurate test results may
occur.
Adjusting Node
If the Node setting is Auto, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
will display the return spectrum, as scanned by the SST,
for the node the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi is currently
connected to.
If you move to another node’s service area, the 860 DSP
or 860 DSPi will automatically begin showing you the
spectrum for the new node.
You can also manually select a different Node : for
display, as long as the node is served by the same SST
as the Node you are connected to.
To change the node, use the buttons to highlight Node and use the buttons to
increment the value up and down.
3.56
SSR
Adjusting Tx Level
The output transmit level (Tx) of the 860 DSP or
860 DSPi needs to be set to the sum of the specified
input level of the return module, plus the test point coupler
insertion loss, plus the losses of any other devices that
may be connected between the test point and the 860
DSP or 860 DSPi.
Once you have calculated this value, you can adjust the
output transmit level while in SSR Mode.
To change the output transmit level, use the
buttons to highlight Tx : and use the buttons to
Using Variable Markers

The spectrum functions of the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi are
equipped with variable markers, one for the graph
transmitted by the SST, one for the spectrum scanned
locally by the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
To set the frequency of the marker, use the buttons
to highlight M, and then use the buttons to increase
and decrease the marker frequency level.
• M1 shows the amplitude of any signals at the
marker frequency on the upper graph (local).
• M2 shows the amplitude of any signals at the
marker frequency on the lower graph (SST).
• The frequency setting of M2 automatically matches that of M1.
3.57
SSR
Using the Compare Function

Both the spectrum scanned by the SST in the hub and the spectrum of the field test point are
presented simultaneously. This makes it easy for you to compare spectrum signatures to
determine whether an ingress outbreak detected in the hub is caused by an ingress source on this
branch of your system.
The SSR Mode displays the reverse spectrum graphs as follows:
• The upper part of the display can represent the reverse sweep graph or a graph of the
reverse spectrum that is scanned locally by the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi. The graph that is
displayed in the upper part of the display can be changed by using the Compare function.
• The lower part of the display always represents the reverse spectrum graph as scanned by
the SST in the hub. The reverse spectrum graph information is transmitted to the field units
through the SST’s forward data carrier. A 9580 SST has eight reverse inputs; a 9581 SST
has 16. In the most common installation configuration, Guardian SSTs are connected to
scan the spectrum of each connected node separately.
Sweep Graph
The Sweep graph is arranged to display +/- 6 dB
variation around a horizontal (“zero”) line representing
the correct settings for a return amplifier.
This value is set automatically by the data
transmission from the SST in the hub.
To sweep a return path, begin at the node and work
down to the last active location in each branch,
selecting gain and tilt pad values that bring the sweep
as close as possible to the “zero” line.
To change to the Sweep graph, press the Compare
softkey, use the buttons to select Sweep, and
then press the button. You may also select Sweep
by pressing .
3.58
SSR
Local + Headend Graph

The Local + Headend graph is arranged to display
a continuously updated view of the reverse spectrum
taken locally.
This graph will allow you to compare the spectrum at
your location against what is being seen at the
headend.
To change to the Local + Headend graph, press the
Compare softkey, use the buttons to select Local
+ Headend, and then press the button. You may
also select Local + Headend by pressing .
3.59
SSR
Local Only Graph

The Local Only graph is arranged to display a
snapshot view of the reverse spectrum taken locally.
To change to the Local Only graph, press the Compare
softkey, use the buttons to select Local Only,
Local Only by pressing .
In the Local Only Mode, only the top (local) spectrum
will be updated.
Saving a Reference Scan

the Save Ref softkey. The Save Sweep Reference file will
appear. Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter a file
name then press the button.
3.60
SSR
Using a Reference Scan

To use the displayed scan as a reference scan, press the
Use Ref softkey, use the buttons to highlight the
desired reference name, and press the button. The
selected reference scan can be used to reference when
sweeping amplifiers.

The Goto softkey gives you rapid access to several spectrum displays.
Goto Spectrum 42
From SSR Mode you can jump to Spectrum 42
Mode which displays the reverse spectrum frequency
range of 4 Mhz to 42 MHz.
To change to Spectrum 42 Mode, press the Goto
softkey, use the buttons to select Spectrum 42,
Spectrum 42 by pressing .
Once in Spectrum 42 Mode, you may change any of
the analyzer settings as described in Section II:
Pressing the button will return you to SSR Mode.
3.61
SSR
Goto Spectrum 65
From SSR Mode you can jump to Spectrum 65
3.62
SSR
Goto Spectrum FSK

From SSR Mode you can jump to Spectrum FSK
Mode which displays the link frequency.
This should allow you to view the telemetry carrier of
the 9581 SST.
To change to Spectrum FSK Mode, press the
Goto softkey, use the buttons to select
Spectrum FSK, and then press the button. You
may also select Spectrum FSK by pressing .
Once in Spectrum FSK Mode, you may change any
of the analyzer settings as described in Section II:
3.63
SSR
Viewing the Tx Frequencies

Pressing the Tx Freqs softkey will display a list of the test
frequencies that your instrument is using to test the return
path.
These frequencies are set by the headend SST base
frequency plus an offset frequency determined by your
SSR ID (A through F).
Active test frequencies will show a number in MHz.
Inactive test frequencies will be blank. The two
frequencies marked with (*) indicate they will be used for
Gain/Tilt calculations.
Note: Your instrument must be communicating with an SST to display

this frequency list.
Adjusting Rx Link Frequency

To change the actual link frequency, press the Rx Link
softkey. The SSR Link Frequency window will appear.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter a frequency value,
evaluating the upstream sweep signals must be set to the appropriate
receive level before you begin your sweep. If the SST is set to the
wrong level amplifier gains may be mis-adjusted.
3.64
SSR

button while in the SSR Mode.
while in SSR Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Toggle Peak Hold
• Save Data Log

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.65
SSR
Toggle Peak Hold

This option is used to hold the maximum signal level
at each frequency, scanned over time. The two
sweep displays will show a dark trace for the peak
hold and a lighter trace for the live sweep.

a bar graph.

buttons to highlight Change Display Mode, and then
3.66
RSA 10. RSA Mode 10

Introduction
RSA Mode configures the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi to function as an upstream sweep transmitter for
troubleshooting micro-reflections and instances of narrow suck-outs between the test point and
the headend. The upstream sweep is transmitted to the 8310 Return SpeedSweep Analyzer
(RSA), installed in the headend. The 8310 RSA sends response information to the 860 DSP or
860 DSPi via a telemetry signal.
RSA Mode equips the instrument with return maintenance functions including:
• Reverse path sweep graphing the response at over 600 individually-settable reverse test
frequencies, as measured in the hub and transmitted to the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
• Reverse gain and tilt, calculated from the reverse sweep display.
• Reverse spectrum view, showing a spectrum plot of the reverse band as scanned in the
headend and transmitted to the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
• Simultaneous display of both the sweep trace and the reverse spectrum, as scanned in the
headend.
• Variable markers that simplify the direct measurement of ingress and traffic amplitudes.
In order to use the RSA Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Return
Sweep Option (SR-1). To use the RSA Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped
with Power Pack Option (PP-1) and Return Sweep Receiver Option (SR-1).
Note: RSA Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860
do not have RSA Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic
3.67
RSA

understanding of how to use RSA Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Using RSA Mode
• Changing Display Resolution
• Setting Spectrum Limit Frequencies
• Instrument Unit Designation
• Setting Test Point Level
• Marker Settings
• Capturing a Reference Scan
• Sweeping an Amplifier
• Adjusting Rx Link Frequency
Required Setup
To use RSA Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have completed
To use RSA Mode, you will need to set up the RSA Mode. Be sure you have completed Section
IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, SSR Mode Settings before
proceeding through this chapter (RSA Mode Settings are contained within the SSR Mode
Settings section).
To use RSA Mode, you will need to setup the 8310 RSA in the headend to communicate with the
860 DSP or 860 DSPi. Refer to the 8310 Reverse SpeedSweep Analyzer operation manual for
setup instructions before proceeding through this chapter.
Note: To use RSA Mode, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi must be in
communication with a Trilithic 8310 Return SpeedSweep Analyzer,
located in the headend. The RSA analyzes sweep test signals from the
860 DSP or 860 DSPi and scan the reverse spectrum. Data collected
by the RSA is transmitted on a frequency-agile downstream data carrier
to the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi in the field for use in reverse path quality
calculations.
3.68
RSA
Using RSA Mode

The RSA Mode transmits a sweep to the 8310 RSA in the headend for analysis. The sweep
frequencies are set on the 8310 RSA in the headend, and the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi tracks the
sweeping signal. The sweep steps around active channels to avoid interference with active
channels.
Reverse sweeping is used to adjust the gain and tilt of reverse distribution amplifiers. When
adjusted, test signals injected into any amplifier’s reverse test point at a particular level will arrive
in the headend at the desired level. To perform the adjustments you must know the injection level
specified for the reverse amplifier modules and the insertion loss of the test point you will be
connecting to.
Note: For more information on 8310 Reverse SpeedSweep Analyzer

setup and sweeping, refer to the 8310 RSA’s operation manual.
Note: The 8310 RSA in the headend that will receive and evaluate the
upstream test signals must be set to the appropriate frequency before
beginning reverse sweep tests. If the 8310 RSA and 860 DSP or 860
DSPi are not set to the same reference level, inaccurate test results
may occur.

On the graph, vertical displacement represents signal
strength. The amplitude represented by the peak column
on the graph is the reference level.
buttons.
3.69
RSA
Changing Display Resolution

per division, as desired.
Setting Spectrum Limit Frequencies

The Start and Stop spectrum limit frequencies are used
to set the lower and upper spectrum display limits on the
860 DSP or 860 DSPi.
To change the Start (lower limit) and Stop (upper limit)
frequencies, use the buttons to highlight the Start
or Stop and use the buttons to increment each
value up or down.
3.70
RSA
Instrument Unit Designation

The 8310 RSA installed in the headend can
communicate with as many as (10) 860 DSP or 860
DSPi field analyzers. If multiple instruments are in
communication with the 8310 RSA, each instrument
must be configured with a different unit designation.
To assign a unique unit designation, use the
buttons to highlight Unit and use the buttons to
increment the value up or down.
Setting Test Point Level

The test point level (TP) of the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
needs to be set to the sum of the specified input level of
the return module, plus the test point coupler insertion
loss, plus the losses of any other devices that may be
connected between the test point and the 860 DSP or
860 DSPi.
Once you have calculated this value, you can adjust the
output transmit level while in RSA Mode.
To change the test point level, use the buttons to
highlight TP and use the buttons to increment the
value up and down.
3.71
RSA
Marker Settings
The spectrum functions of the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi are equipped with variable markers. These
markers can be used to make amplitude measurements of the sweep at user-selected
frequencies, or to determine the difference (Delta) in level or frequency between two selected
sweep points.
Press the softkey to toggle the display between vertical markers (frequency) and horizontal
markers (level).
To set the level of the vertical marker, use the
buttons to highlight Freq as it corresponds to Marker V1
or Marker V2, and then use the buttons to
increment the marker to higher or lower frequencies. You
can also enter a frequency directly using the
• Marker V1 shows the frequency of the sweep at
the marker frequency.
• Marker V2 shows the frequency of the sweep at
the marker frequency.
To set the level of the horizontal marker, use the
buttons to highlight the amplitude level as it
corresponds to Marker H1 or Marker H2, and then use
the buttons to increment the marker to higher or
lower amplitude levels. You can also enter an amplitude
level directly using the alphanumeric keypad and
pressing the button.
• Marker H1 shows the amplitude level of the
sweep at the marker level.
• Marker H2 shows the amplitude level of the
sweep at the marker level.
3.72
RSA
Capturing a Reference Scan

The reference scan will be used to remove measurement errors caused by variations in carrier
amplitudes. In most cases, the reference scan will be taken at the node for the service area you
will be sweeping.
the Save Ref softkey, use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the desired reference name, and press the
button. The current scan has now been saved with the
selected reference scan name for use as a reference
when sweeping amplifiers.
the scan on-screen.
Sweeping an Amplifier
The process for sweeping an amplifier is very similar to
that used to capture a reference scan.
Press the Use Ref softkey, use the buttons to

highlight the reference file for the node that serves this
area, and press the button.
3.73
RSA
The instrument now displays a graph representing the

gain and tilt performance of the amplifier. When the
amplifier is properly aligned, the trace will coincide with
the center (fourth from the bottom) horizontal line of the
graph’s grid.
While using a reference, the Ref and TAP settings are
automatically adjusted to position the trace at the
appropriate point in the graph, and are not manually
adjustable.
To stop using the reference function, press the Use Ref
softkey, use the buttons to highlight No Ref, and
press the button.

softkey. The RSA Link Frequency window will appear.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter a frequency value,
Note: The 8310 RSA in the hub that will be receiving and evaluating
the upstream sweep signals must be set to the appropriate receive
level before you begin your sweep. If the 8310 RSA is set to the wrong
level, amplifier gains may be mis-adjusted.
3.74
RSA

button while in the RSA Mode.
while in RSA Mode:
• Setting TP Compensation
• Toggling the Ingress View
• Toggling Peak Hold

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.75
RSA

a bar graph.
buttons to highlight Change Display Mode,
Change Display Mode by pressing .
3.76
RSA
Setting TP Compensation
added to all measurements made in RSA Mode.
• The Function Menu will close and the Return
Compensation window will open.
Injection Level, Test Point, or Tx Level
and enter the value using the alphanumeric
button or allow approximately five seconds
for the Return Compensation window to
close.
• The Return Compensation window will
close and the RSA Mode will display the
combined (Injection Level, Test Point, and
Probe) test point compensation value below
the graph.
3.77
RSA
Toggle Ingress View

You can toggle a graphic overlay of system ingress
on or off, which will affect the balancing of amplifiers
over the spectrum graph.
buttons to highlight Toggle Ingress View, and
Ingress View by pressing .
3.78
RSA
Toggle Peak Hold

You can toggle a hold function that will display the
maximum recorded ingress over the spectrum graph.
Hold will appear in the upper-left corner of the
spectrum display to indicate that Toggle Peak Hold
has been selected.
3.79
RSVP 11. RSVP Mode 11

Introduction
RSVP Mode equips the instrument with the return path testing functions of a Trilithic Guardian
RSVP installer’s reverse tester. This mode enables the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi to perform several
key reverse path quality tests to insure trouble-free installations including:
• Determining the reverse signal “launch level” needed for a signal from the subscriber’s
terminal to arrive in the hub at the appropriate amplitude.
• Determining the bandwidth-corrected carrier / (noise + ingress) ratio for the path from the
subscriber’s terminal to the hub.
• Automatically comparing both measurements to user-set limits and displaying PASS or
FAIL indications.
RSVP Mode also equips your instrument with some additional features not available in the Trilithic
Guardian RSVP reverse tester including:
• Simultaneous testing of launch level and C/(N+I) on up to eight frequencies.
• Simultaneous display of markers for each test frequency, the reverse spectrum, and test
results with PASS or FAIL messages, for all active test frequencies.
In order to use the RSVP Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Return
Tester Option (VP-1). In order to use the RSVP Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be
equipped with Power Pack Option (PP-1) and Return Tester Option (VP-1).
Note: RSVP Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860
do not have RSVP Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
3.80
RSVP

understanding of how to use RSVP Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Using RSVP Mode
• Viewing the Tx Frequencies
• Adjusting Rx Link Level
Required Setup
To use RSVP Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
To use RSVP Mode, you will need to set up the RSVP Mode. Be sure you have completed
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, RSVP Mode Settings before
To use RSVP Mode with a 9581 SST R4 in Normal Mode, you will need to set up the return link
parameters. Be sure you have completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument
Setup Mode, Ret Link Settings before proceeding through this chapter.
Note: To use RSVP Mode, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi must be in
communication with a Trilithic Guardian 9580 SST (0.3 Mhz – 42 MHz)
or 9581 SST (0.3 – 65 MHz) Reverse Analyzer located in the hub.
SSTs are digitizers which analyze test signals from the 860 DSP or
860 DSPi and scan the reverse spectrum, measuring traffic and
ingress. Data collected by the SST is transmitted on a downstream
data carrier to instruments in the field for use in reverse path quality
calculations.
3.81
RSVP
Using RSVP Mode

The instrument displays several types of data at once in RSVP Mode:
• The reverse spectrum for the path you are connected to, showing noise, ingress and
services traffic.
• Triangular markers showing the test frequencies that are active and the progress of the
“launch level” test.
• A list showing PASS or FAIL for each active test carrier frequency, with the measured
launch level and C/I ratio for each carrier.
When the RSVP Mode is started, the RSVP test sequence begins running.
When the test has finished, the results are displayed and the RSVP Mode is idle.
To begin another test sequence press the Start softkey.
The instrument then automatically runs the RSVP test sequence, evaluates the data and displays
the results, then stops until you press the Start softkey again.
During the test sequence the marker triangles rise on the display as the instrument adjusts its
launch levels. At the completion of the launch test the markers for all frequencies that passed the
test are displayed stationary at the reference level of the SST in the hub.
During the tests, the reverse spectrum display is updated every 0.8 seconds until the selected
number of samples is attained.
evaluating the upstream test signals must be set to the appropriate
reference level before you begin your RSVP tests. If the SST is set to
the wrong reference level inaccurate test results may occur.
3.82
RSVP


The Goto softkey gives you rapid access to several spectrum displays.
Goto Spectrum 42
From RSVP Mode you can jump to Spectrum 42
Pressing the button will return you to RSVP Mode.
3.83
RSVP
Goto Spectrum 65
From RSVP Mode you can jump to Spectrum 65
3.84
RSVP
Goto Spectrum FSK

From RSVP Mode you can jump to Spectrum FSK
Mode which displays the link frequency.
To change to Spectrum FSK Mode, press the
Goto softkey, use the buttons to select
Spectrum FSK, and then press the button. You
may also select Spectrum FSK by pressing .
Once in Spectrum FSK Mode, you may change any
of the analyzer settings as described in Section II:
3.85
RSVP
Viewing the Tx Frequencies

Pressing the Tx Freqs softkey will display a list of the test
frequencies that your instrument is using to test the return
path.
These frequencies are set by the headend SST base
frequency plus an offset frequency determined by your
RSVP ID (A through F).
Note: Your instrument must be communicating with an SST to display

this frequency list.

softkey. The RSVP Link Frequency window will
appear. Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter a
frequency value, and then press the button.
evaluating the upstream sweep signals must be set to the appropriate
receive level before you begin your sweep. If the SST is set to the
wrong level amplifier gains may be mis-adjusted.
3.86
RSVP

button while in the RSVP Mode.
while in RSVP Mode and are described in Section I:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.87
VSB 12. VSB Mode 12

Introduction
In VSB Mode the instrument operates similar to the QAM Mode without channel plan support. In
order to use the VSB Mode on your 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with
Vestigial Sideband Modulation Option (VSB).
understanding of how to use VSB Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Frequency
• Selecting Modulation Type
• Changing Symbol Rate
• Changing Bandwidth
• Setting the Display Mode
Note: VSB Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860
do not have VSB Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
Required Setup
To use VSB Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
3.88
VSB
Setting Frequency
To change the frequency, use the buttons to
highlight the frequency, use the buttons to
press the button.
Note: This mode does not make use of the current channel plan; you
must manually select your channel frequency.
Selecting Modulation Type

To change the modulation type, use the buttons to
highlight the modulation type, use the buttons to
increment the value up and down, and then press the
button.
You can select from the modulation types as follows:
• 8 VSB: This represents eight amplitude levels
that support up to 19.28 Mbps of data in a single
6 MHz channel.
• 16 VSB: This represents eight amplitude levels
that support up to 38.57 Mbps of data in a single
6 MHz channel.
3.89
Changing Symbol Rate
To change the symbol rate, use the buttons to
highlight the symbol rate, use the buttons to
symbol rate using the alphanumeric keypad, and then
press the button.
Changing Bandwidth
To change the bandwidth, use the buttons to
highlight the bandwidth, use the buttons to
bandwidth using the alphanumeric keypad, and then
press the button.
3.90
VSB
Setting the Display Mode

VSB Mode has three display options; digital constellation, equalizer tap diagram, and BER graph.
To change display modes use the Display softkey to toggle between the displays.
Using the Constellation Display

The constellation display graphs symbol values on an
I and Q grid. The constellation display is useful for
observing impairments in the digital signal.
In 8 VSB, the digital information is transmitted
exclusively in the amplitude of the RF envelope and
not in the phase. This is unlike other digital
modulation formats, such as QAM, where each point
in the signal constellation is a certain vector
combination of carrier amplitude and phase. A QAM-
like arrangement is not possible in 8 VSB since the
carrier phase is no longer an independent variable
under our control, but is rather “consumed” in suppressing the lower sideband.
The eight levels are recovered by sampling an in-phase (I channel) synchronous detector.
Nothing would be gained by sampling a quadrature (Q) channel detector since no useful
information is contained in this channel. The signal constellation diagram is therefore a series
eight vertical lines that correspond to the eight transmitted amplitude levels.
When the 8 VSB signal is corrupted, the eight vertical lines become blurred and errors are
received.
Using the Zoom Feature

The instrument allows you to easily zoom in or out on a constellation display.
To zoom in on a constellation display, press the Zoom In softkey. A selection window will
appear in the display.
Use the buttons to place the selection window on the desired location then
press the Zoom In softkey. If the selection window still appears, you can continue to zoom in
by positioning the window and pressing the Zoom In softkey.
To zoom out from a constellation display press the Zoom Out softkey. Press the Zoom Out
softkey repeatedly to zoom out further.
3.91
VSB
Using the Equalizer Tap Diagram

The equalizer tap diagram shows the relative
amplitude of the equalizer taps needed to correct
phase and amplitude distortions in the VSB signal.
The equalizer tap diagram is useful in determining
presence of reflections. You can get an approximate
distance to fault indication by using the Eq Left or
Eq Right softkeys to place the indicator on the tap of
interest.
Using the BER Graph

The BER graph shows the ratio of corrupted bits to
total bits in the VSB signal. The analyzer dwells on
the selected channel, counting good bits and
watching for individual corrupted bits. The BER graph
shows errored bits as vertical lines that expand
horizontally across the display with advancing time.
3.92
VSB

button while in the VSB Mode.
while in VSB Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Set TP Compensation

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Set TP Compensation
3.93
VITS 13. VITS Mode 13

Introduction
In VITS Mode the instrument analyzes the signal characteristics of VITS (Vertical Interval Test
Signals) signals to measure in-channel response, differential phase, differential gain, and
chroma-delay. This mode also displays the test signal itself. In order to use the VITS Mode on your
860 DSP or 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with the VITS Option (VITS).
understanding of how to use VITS Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Averaging Type
• Setting Line Number
• Setting Even/Odd Fields
• Setting Test Type
Note: VITS Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860
do not have VITS Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
Required Setup
To use VITS Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have completed
3.94
VITS
Setting Averaging Type

To set the averaging type, use the buttons to
highlight Avg= and then use the buttons to set the
averaging type to Avg 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 as
desired.
Increasing Avg will slow down test times but results in
more accurate results. For improved results, set Avg to
at least 64.
Adjusting Channels
the button.
channel is scrambled, the message VITS Not Available
Setting Line Number

To change the line number, use the buttons to
highlight the line number, use the buttons to
channel line number using the alphanumeric keypad, and
3.95
VITS
Setting Even/Odd Fields

To change between even and odd fields, use the
buttons to highlight the Even/Odd field, use the
buttons to change the value between Even and Odd.
Setting Test Type

To set the type of test to perform, use the buttons to highlight the test type field, use the
buttons to increment change the value between Line Viewer, Diff Gain/Phase, Chroma
Delay, or In Channel Response.
Line Viewer
When the test type is set to Line Viewer the
instrument simply displays the VITS signal using a
line viewer. No measurements are made when this
test type is selected and the progress bar will always
show 0%.
3.96
VITS
Differential Gain and Phase

When the test type is set to Diff Gain/Phase the
instrument will measure and display the differential
gain and phase.
• Differential Gain - This is the change in
amplitude of the chrominance signal as a
function of the amplitude of the associated
luminance signal.
• Differential Phase - This is the change in
phase of the chrominance signal as a function
of the amplitude of the associated luminance
signal.
The progress bar will show the status of the test.
Note: The test will not start until the appropriate line, field, and signal
type have been selected.
Changing Test Signal Type

To change the test signal type, use the
buttons to highlight the test signal type field, use
the buttons to change the value between
FCC (5 Step), FCC (10 Step), NTC7 (5 Step),
or NTC7 (10 Step).
3.97
VITS
Including / Skipping Last Step

To include or skip the last step of the chrominance
staircase when measuring the differential gain
and phase, use the buttons to highlight the
last step field, use the buttons to change the
value between Include Last and Skip Last
Step.
Typically the last step is skipped due to clipping
circuitry contained in modulators.
Chrominance-Luminance Delay
When the test type is set to Chroma Delay the
instrument will measure and display the chrominance-
luminance delay. This is the change in delay time of
the chrominance component of the signal relative to
the luminance component after passing through the
system.
Note: The test will not start until the appropriate line, field, and signal
type have been selected.
3.98
VITS
Changing Test Signal Type

To change the test signal type, use the
buttons to highlight the test signal type field, use
the buttons to change the value between
FCC (5 Step), FCC (10 Step), NTC7 (5 Step),
or NTC7 (10 Step).
In-Channel Response
When the test type is set to In Channel Resp the
instrument will measure and display the in-channel
flatness of the TV passband frequency response.
The FCC requires that the in-channel response be
within +/- 2 dB for a range of 0.75 MHz to 5 MHz
above the lower boundary frequency of the channel
(0.5 MHz to 3.58 MHz above the visual carrier may
be used instead).
Typically a multiburst signal is used for this
measurement. This signal usually includes six bursts
of discrete frequencies that range from 0.5 MHz to
4.1 MHz.
By looking at the spectrum of the multiburst signal, it is possible to measure in-channel
response by comparing the maximum variation in the magnitudes of each discrete burst
frequency to the FCC limit.
3.99
VITS

button.

button while in the VITS Mode.
while in VITS Mode and are described in Section I: The
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.100
QAM EVS 14. QAM EVS Mode 14

Introduction
The Error Vector Spectrum Menu (QAM EVS) allows the operator to tune the meter to a
downstream QAM channel and display its error vector spectrum to reveal noise and ingress that
may be present under the QAM channel. This feature is a component of the QA-1 option for the
860 DSP and QA-2 option for the 860 DSPi, and will present itself when the unit is updated with
the January 2008 firmware. 860 DSPi owners may activate the QA-2 option and 860 DSP owners
may activate the QA-1 option in the field by purchasing a key code.
This section will provide you with the basic understanding of how to use QAM EVS Mode
including:
• Required Setup
• QAM EVS Support
• Using QAM EVS Mode
• Adjusting Marker
• Adjusting Digital Frequencies
Required Setup
To use QAM EVS Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
To use QAM EVS Mode, you will need to set up the QAM EVS Mode. Be sure you have
completed Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Digital Settings
3.101
QAM EVS
Using QAM EVS Mode

The QAM EVS test can be performed on a channel from a specified channel plan or
custom user entered QAM channel. The mode of operation is a cross between the QAM
Mode and the Spectrum Analyzer mode.
As soon as the operator enters the QAM EVS Mode, it is tuned to the last tuned channel in
the QAM Mode. The operator can then adjust the reference (top line of spectrum display),
the digital channel, the modulation, the frequency, the symbol rate, the bandwidth, and the
dB per division.
The center frequency of the display is the center frequency of the channel. The span of the
display is the channel’s symbol rate.
When the unit locks onto the QAM signal, the error vector spectrum is plotted. The user can
also see the current MER in the upper left of the graph. The markers and peak can be used
to help determine the frequency of unwanted signals present in the QAM channel.

highlight Ref= and then adjust the current value using the
buttons.
3.102
QAM EVS
Adjusting Channels
the button.

Adjusting Digital Frequency

To change the DIG frequency, use the buttons to
highlight the channel number, use the buttons to
channel number using the alphanumeric keypad, and
3.103
QAM EVS
Adjusting Marker
To change the marker, use the buttons to highlight
the marker frequency, use the buttons to increment
the value up and down or enter the desired frequency
the button.

button.
3.104
QAM EVS

The Function Menu can be accessed by pressing the button while in the QAM EVS Mode.
while in QAM EVS Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
• Set TP Compensation

The following functions are described in Section I:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
Set TP Compensation
3.105
Traffic 15. TraffiControl Mode 15

Introduction
The 860 DSPi TraffiControl option can be used to display the ingress that is present “underneath”
an upstream cable modem channel, or any bursty signal.
This section will provide you with the basic understanding of how to use TraffiControl Mode
including:
• Required Setup
• Using TraffiControl Mode
• Adjusting Digital Frequency
• Adjusting Bandwidth
• Adjusting Marker
• Adjusting Trigger
Required Setup
To use TraffiControl Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters. Be sure you have
chapter.
3.106
Traffic
Using TraffiControl Mode

The TraffiControl Mode provides a fixed frequency span of 8 MHz. The user enters the center
frequency of the upstream cable modem signal (DIG:), and the bandwidth (BW:). (DOCSIS and
Euro DOCSIS upstream bandwidths are 200 kHz, 400 kHz, 800 kHz, 1600 kHz, 3200 kHz, or
6400 kHz).
The TraffiControl display shows three traces: a Traffic trace, a Live Noise trace, and a Peak Noise
trace. The Traffic trace (gray) shows the last captured signal containing traffic. The Live Noise
trace (gray) shows the last captured signal without traffic. The Peak Noise trace (black) shows a
persistent peak hold of the noise trace. This simple and comprehensive display enables a user to
see what is currently happening, as well as capture peak interference levels of transient signals
during the time that the measurement is being made.

highlight Ref= and then adjust the value using the
buttons.
3.107
Traffic

Adjusting Digital Frequency

The center frequency of the display can be changed by
adjusting the digital frequency (DIG).
To change the DIG frequency, use the buttons to
highlight DIG:, use the buttons to increment the
value up and down or enter the desired frequency using
the alphanumeric keypad, and then press the button.
3.108
Traffic
Adjusting Bandwidth Frequency

The bandwidth frequency of the display can be changed
by adjusting the bandwidth frequency (BW).
To change the bandwidth frequency, use the
buttons to highlight BW:, use the buttons to
press the button.
Adjusting Marker
To adjust the position of the marker on the display, use
the buttons to highlight the marker and amplitude
readout. Use the buttons to position the marker
along the display.
The frequency and amplitude of the signal beneath the
marker will be displayed in the readout.
Adjusting Trigger
The trigger of the display can be changed by adjusting
the trigger level (Trig). The recommended level is
approximately 10 dB below the level of the traffic signal.
To change the trigger level, use the buttons to
highlight Trig =. Use the buttons to increment the
value up and down in one dB increments.
The Reset soft key will re-trigger the signal and refresh
the screen with the data captured during the reset cycle.
3.109
Traffic

The Function Menu can be accessed by pressing the button while in the TraffiControl Mode.
while in TraffiControl Mode, and are described in
Section I: The Basics, Chapter 6: Basic Function Menu
Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
3.110
860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Cable Analyzer
Section IV: Setup Functions

1. Setup Function Overview 1

Introduction
The instrument enables you to select from numerous instrument setup and procedures. The
instruments features several Setup Functions which come with the instruments and may have one
or more optional functions.
This section will provide you with instructions on how to utilize the functions available in the Setup
Menu of the instrument:
may be customized and therefore may differ from the Setup menu
860 DSP 860 DSPi

Mode Description
Option Option
Setup Allows you set the general preferences for data

Standard Standard
Instrument display and data functionality.
Setup
Allows you to change power management settings

Power
for Power Scheme, Processor Speed, Backlight Standard Standard
Power
Level, Unit Off Timer and Backlight Timer.
Management
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Section IV: Setup Functions
4.2
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
Allows you to perform file maintenance functions

FILES
Standard Standard
such as previewing and deleting files.
File Explorer
i
Info
Provides information about the 860 DSPi system's
Standard Standard
Instrument operation capabilities.
Information
and Hardware.
4.3
Setup 2. Instrument Setup Mode 2

Introduction
There are several settings that can be accessed from the
Instrument Setup Mode. The basic 860 DSP and 860
DSPi come equipped with the Instrument Setup Mode
as a standard feature.
To select the parameter that you wish to setup, use the
buttons to highlight the desired setting and then
press the button.
Note: Although the instrument will cycle through the settings in order and
this chapter follows that order, you DO NOT have to setup the
parameters in this order.
When a setup parameter is selected, the instrument will display a new window to enter data by
using the alphanumeric keypad or the buttons.
this mode.
Note: All changes that are made in the Instrument Setup Mode, will
take affect immediately unless otherwise noted.
Note: Depending on options installed on you instrument, you may not

need to setup all the parameters shown. Optional setup items will be
“grayed out” if you do not have them installed on your instrument. To view
the installed functions on your instrument, see Chapter 5: Instrument
Information Mode.
Note: It is possible to lock users out of the Instrument Setup Mode by

using the WorkBench Software.
4.4
Setup
Global Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s Global Settings. The Global Settings
window allows you to assign various global characteristics to your instrument. These settings are
unique to your instrument and will remain constant throughout every operation you perform.
These parameters can be set directly from your instrument or using WorkBench. For instructions
regarding setup using WorkBench, please refer to the WorkBench Operation Manual.
of how to modify the Global Settings including:
• Operator Name
• Company Name
• Keyboard Beeps
• Current Language
• Current Date and Time
• Web Server Port
• Web Server Port Security
• Web Server Offset
• Notepad Utility
• Screen Capture
4.5
Setup
Operator Name
The Operator Name setting allows you personalize
your instrument with your name. It will be displayed on
the introduction screen when your instrument is turned
on. This information will also be added to every data
log.
To change the operator name, use the buttons
to highlight the Operator Name field, press the
button, enter the operator name using the
As many as 32 characters can be entered, however
only 24 characters will be displayed.
Company Name
The Company Name setting allows you to
personalize your instrument with your company’s
name. It will be displayed on the introduction screen
when your instrument is turned on. This information
will also be added to every data log.
To change the company name, use the buttons
to highlight the Company Name field, press the
button, enter the company name using the
Keyboard Beeps
Your instrument is equipped with an audio speaker
for you to hear various functions, including keyboard
beeps whenever you push any button. The default for
keyboard beeps is YES.
To change this setting, use the buttons to
highlight the Keyboard Beeps field, and then use
the button and/or buttons to select Yes or
No.
• Select Yes to hear the keyboard beeps.
• Select No to mute the keyboard beeps.
4.6
Setup
Language
Your instrument can be equipped to work in various
languages. The default language is English. Contact
the factory for other language options.
If you have other language options available on your
instrument, you can change the default language.
Use the buttons to highlight the Language
field, and then use the button or buttons to
select the default language.
Note: You must restart your instrument for this change to take effect.
Current Date
You can program your instrument to display the
current date in the status bar of your display screen.
To change the current date, use the buttons to
highlight the left-most field next to Current Date/
Time, press the button, enter the current date
button.
The date should be entered using the mm/dd/yyyy
format.
Note: The date will automatically save once all of the numbers in the
mm/dd/yyyy format are entered. If you enter an invalid date, the current
date will not change.
4.7
Setup
Current Time
You can program your instrument to display the
current time in the status bar of your display screen.
To change the current time, use the buttons to
highlight the right-most field next to Current Date/
Time, press the button, enter the current time
button.
The time should be entered using the hh:mm:ss
format. Note that the time is in 24-hour, or military
format.
Note: The time will automatically save once all of the numbers in the
hh:mm:ss format are entered. If you enter an invalid time, the current time
will not change.
Web Server Port

Your instrument may be equipped with Remote
Control Mode.
The Web Port setting allows you to specify the port in
which your instrument will be communicating with the
network and if the port is Secure or Unsecure.
The web server default port is set to Port 80.
To change the web port, use the buttons to
highlight the Web Server Port field, and use the
buttons to increment the value by 1, or press the
button, enter the number of the desired web port
using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press the button.
To change the web port security, use the buttons to highlight the Web Server Port
(Secure/Unsecure) field, and use the and/or buttons to change the security of the web
port.
Note: You must restart your instrument for this change to take effect.
4.8
Setup
Web Server Offset

Web browser’s uses Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
for the universal time while browsing Internet pages.
This effects both the internal Web Browser Mode
and Remote Control Mode.
The Web Server Offset setting allows you specify
the time difference between your current time and
GMT. The default is set for -300 minutes (5 hours
behind GMT).
To change the web server offset, use the
buttons to highlight the Web Server Offset field, and
use the or button to decrease the time
difference in 5 minute increments or use the button to increase the time difference in
5 minute increments.
Notepad Utility
Your instrument may be equipped with a legacy
notepad and/or web browser notepad.
The Notepad Utility setting allows you specify the
type of notepad to use. The default for the notepad is
Legacy Notepad.
To change the type of notepad, use the buttons
to highlight the Notepad Utility field, and use the
button and/or the buttons to change
between Legacy Notepad and Browser Notepad.
Note: The Legacy Notepad can only open text files. Whereas, the
Browser Notepad can open text files and HTML files.
4.9
Setup
Screen Capture
The Screen Capture setting sets the file type for
capturing and saving screen shots while using
various measurement functions.
The following three file types are available:
• Standard BMP - Large file size.
• Direct LCD - Medium file size, approximately
50% smaller than Standard BMP.
• Compressed BMPZ - Very small file size,
approximately 90% smaller than Standard
BMP.
The default screen capture type is set to Compressed BMPZ.
To change the screen capture type, use the buttons to highlight the Screen Capture
field, and use the button and/or the buttons to change between Standard BMP,
Direct LCD, and Compressed BMPZ.
Note: Choosing a smaller file size will allow you to save more screen
captures on you instrument at any one time.
4.10
Setup
Measurement Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s Measurement Settings. The
Measurement Settings window allows you to assign various measurement characteristics to
your instrument. These settings are unique to your instrument and will remain constant throughout
every operation you perform.
regarding setup using WorkBench, please refer to the WorkBench operation manual.
of how to modify the Measurement Settings including:
• Temperature Units
• Measurement Units
• Analog Noise BW
• Optimal Modulation
• Channel Spacing
• Hum Type (50/60 Hz)
• Screen Capture Type
• Test point
• Test point / Probe Value
• Data Log Attachments
4.11
Setup
Temperature Units
Your instrument is equipped to display temperature
readings in two temperature units; Celsius or
Fahrenheit. The default unit for temperature is
Celsius.
To change the temperature units, use the
buttons to highlight the Temperature Units field, and
use the button and/or the buttons to change
between Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Measurement Units
Your instrument is equipped to display three different
measurement units; dBmV, dBμ μV, and dBm in
either feet or meters. The default unit for
measurement is dBmV.
To change the dBmV, dBμ μV, and dBm
measurement units, use the buttons to
highlight the Measurement Units field, and use the
between dBmV, dBμ μV, and dBm.
To change the feet and meter measurement units,

use the buttons to highlight the Measurement
Units field, and use the button and/or the
buttons to change between feet and meter.
4.12
Setup
Analog Noise BW
The Analog Noise BW setting is the noise bandwidth used when computing C/N for analog
TV channels. The default analog noise bandwidth is 4.000 MHz.
To change the analog noise bandwidth, use the
buttons to highlight the Analog Noise BW
field, and use the buttons to change the
bandwidth in 0.05 MHz increments, or press the
button, enter the bandwidth using the
Optimal Modulation
The Optimal Modulation setting sets the marker on
the % modulation bar graph. It is also used to
compute signal level in SECAM L. The default
percent modulation is set at 87.5%.
To change the optimal modulation, use the
buttons to highlight the Optimal Modulation field,
and use the or button to increase the percent
modulation in 0.1% increments or use the button to
decrease the percent modulation in 0.1% increments.
4.13
Setup
Channel Spacing
The Channel Spacing setting is used as one of the
frequency step sizes you can select when tuning by
frequency. The default channel spacing frequency is
6 MHz.
To change the channel spacing, use the
buttons to highlight the Channel Spacing field, and
use the or button to change the channel
spacing in 0.025 MHz increments or press the
button, enter the channel spacing using the
alphanumeric keypad, and then press the button

again.
Hum Type (50/60 Hz)

This frequency is used when measuring power line
related Hum. You can set the AC power frequency for
either 50 or 60 Hz. The default AC power frequency
is 60 Hz.
To change the number of AC power frequency, use
the buttons to highlight the Hum Type
(50/60 Hz) Field, and use the or buttons to
change between 50 and 60 Hz.
4.14
Setup
Test point
The Test point setting allows you to enable and
disable the constant offset that will be added to all
measurements made in Level, QAM, Tilt, Scan,
Spectrum Analyzer, C/N, and CSO/CTB Modes in
order to have the unit automatically adjust the data to
overcome test point losses. The default setting is
Disabled.
To enable and disable test point compensation, use
the buttons to highlight the Test point field,
and use the button and/or the buttons to
change between Disabled and Enabled.
Test point / Probe Value

The Test point / Probe Value setting allows you to
set the constant offset for the test point and/or probe
that will be added to all measurements made in
Level, QAM, Tilt, Scan, Spectrum Analyzer, C/N,
and CSO/CTB Modes in order to have the unit
automatically adjust the data to overcome test point
losses. The default settings are 0.0 dB.
To change the offset value for the test point, use the
buttons to highlight the left-most field next to
Test point / Probe Value, use the or button to
increase the offset value in 0.1 dB increments or use
the button to decrease the offset value in 0.1 dB
increments.
To change the offset value for the probe, use the
buttons to highlight the right-most field next to
Test point / Probe Value, use the or button to
increase the offset value in 0.1 dB increments or use
the button to decrease the offset value in 0.1 dB
increments.
4.15
Setup
Data Log Attachments

The Data Log Attachments setting allows you to
choose whether to assign a location and/or task to
any data logs that you wish to save. The default
setting is None.
To choose whether to assign a location and/or task to
any data logs that you wish to save, use the
buttons to highlight the Data Log Attachments field,
change between None, Locations, Tasks, and
Locations+Tasks.
Note: For more information on saving data logs, see Section I: The
Basics, Chapter 6: Basic Function Menu Options, Save Data Log.
4.16
Setup
SSR Mode Settings

This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s SSR Mode Settings. The Return
Sweep Settings window allows you to assign return sweep settings to your instrument. These
settings are unique to your instrument and will remain constant throughout every operation you
perform.
These parameters can be set directly from your
instrument or using WorkBench. For instructions
regarding setup using WorkBench, please refer to the
WorkBench Operation Manual.
of how to modify the SSR Mode Settings including:
• SSR Tx Level
• SSR Link Frequency
• RSA Link Frequency
• SSR Sweep Carriers
• SSR Gain/Tilt Frequencies
• SSR Unit ID (A-F)
• RSA Unit ID (A-J)
• SSR Local Input
Note: SSR Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860 DSPi.
To view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV: Setup
SSR Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-
2412 to order this option and start using it today.
4.17
Setup
SSR Tx Level
The level of the sweep signals transmitted to a SST
by the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi can be set between 20
dBmV and 55 dBmV. The default sweep signal level
is 40 dBmV.
To change the sweep signal level, use the
buttons to highlight the SSR Tx Level field, and use
the buttons to change the sweep signal level in
1 dBmV increments, or press the button, enter the
sweep signal level using the alphanumeric keypad,
Note: If you use different Tx Levels in different parts of your system you
can also set the Tx Level directly while using SSR Mode; see Section
III: Service Functions, Chapter 9: SSR Mode, Adjusting Tx Level.
SSR Link Frequency

The SST in the hub communicates with field units via
a downstream “link” carrier. The frequency of this
carrier is set at the hub, and the SSR Link setting of
the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi must match it. The default
link frequency is 80.00 MHz.
To set the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi to receive the “link”
carrier, use the buttons to highlight the SSR
Link Frequency field, and use the buttons to
change the link frequency in 0.05 MHz increments, or
press the button, enter the link frequency using the
Note: If you use different Link Frequencies in different parts of your

system you can also set the Link Frequency directly while using SSR
Mode; see Section III: Service Functions, Chapter 9: SSR Mode,
Adjusting Rx Link Level.
4.18
Setup
RSA Link Frequency

The RSA in the hub communicates with field units via
carrier is set at the hub, and the RSA Link setting of
the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi must match it. The default
link frequency is 80.00 MHz.
carrier, use the buttons to highlight the RSA
change the link frequency in 0.05 MHz increments, or
press the button, enter the link frequency using the
4.19
Setup
SSR Sweep Carriers

The 860 DSP or 860 DSPi transmits up to eight
sweep frequencies, which are set in the SST in the
hub. The settings are transmitted to field units as part
of the regular data transmissions at the “link”
frequency. Normally, all of the frequencies would be
active during a sweep, but it may be necessary to
switch a carrier off in some parts of your system
because services already occupy the frequency.
To set the sweep carriers, use the buttons to
highlight the SSR Sweep Carriers field, and use the
button and/or the buttons to set the carrier to
ON (number displayed) or OFF (blank, no number displayed).
SSR Gain/Tilt Frequencies

Two of the eight sweep carriers that the 860 DSP or
860 DSPi transmits can be selected for automatic
gain and tilt calculations. The computed values
simplify gain/tilt pad selection when balancing return
amplifiers.
To set the sweep carriers to use for automatic gain
and tilt calculations, use the buttons to
highlight the corresponding field next to the SSR
Gain/Tilt Freqs field, and use the button and/or
the buttons to set the carrier (indicated with
an X).
4.20
Setup
SSR Unit ID (A-F)

Up to six field units may communicate with a
particular SST at one time. Each unit is identified by
a single character, “A” through “F”. No two units
connected to the same SST can use the same ID
character.
To set the unit ID, use the buttons to highlight
the SSR Unit ID (A-F) field, and use the button
and/or the buttons to cycle through the desired
unit ID.
Note: Trilithic RSVP Installer Reverse Testers, 860 DSPs, and

860 DSPi’s running the RSVP Mode always have the Unit ID of Unit F.
If you have any of these devices running the RSVP Mode on your system,
DO NOT set the SSR Unit ID to Unit F.
RSA Unit ID (A-J)

Up to 10 field units may communicate with a
particular RSA at one time. Each unit is identified by
a single character, “A” through “J”. No two units
connected to the same RSA can use the same ID
character.
To set the unit ID, use the buttons to highlight
the RSA Unit ID (A-J) field, and use the button
and/or the buttons to cycle through the desired
unit ID.
4.21
Setup
SSR Local Input

When using the Compare Function in SSR Mode
the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi needs access to both the
upstream and downstream path.
The downstream connection allows the instrument to
receive the link data carrier from the SST in the hub;
the reverse connection is used to inject reverse
sweep signals.
The SSR Local Input selects which connector the
instrument will use to sample the Local Ingress in
order to compare it against the SST Ingress Sample
taken at the head end.
The 860 DSP or 860 DSPi can accommodate either arrangement.
To set the local input, use the buttons to highlight the SSR Local Input field, and use
the button and/or the buttons to change between SLM / Forward or Reverse / Both.
4.22
Setup
RSVP Mode Settings

This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s RSVP Mode Settings. The Return
Test Settings window allows you to assign return test settings to your instrument. These settings
are unique to your instrument and will remain constant throughout every operation you perform.
of how to modify the RSVP Mode Settings including:
• RSVP Max Tx Level
• RSVP Link Frequency
• RSVP Test Carriers
• RSVP C/I Threshold
• RSVP C/I Bandwidth
• RSVP C/I Samples
Note: RSVP Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and 860
DSPi. To view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV:
have RSVP Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at
4.23
Setup
RSVP Maximum Tx Level

The maximum acceptable level of the test signals
transmitted to an SST by the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
can be set between 20 dBmV and 55 dBmV. During
the RSVP test, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
determines what level is needed to communicate with
the SST in the hub. The default maximum transmit
level is 40 dBmV.
Transmit levels that exceed the RSVP Max Tx Level
setting are an indication of reverse path transmission
problems, and will cause a FAIL message.
To change the maximum acceptable level of the test
signals transmitted to an SST by the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, use the buttons to highlight
the RSVP Max Tx Level field, and use the buttons to change the value in 1 dBmV
increments, or press the button, enter the maximum signal level using the alphanumeric
Note: For tests using RSVP Mode to be accurate, it is necessary to set

the reference level of the SST in the hub to the appropriate level. Consult
your Guardian SST manual for more details.
4.24
Setup
RSVP Link Frequency

The SST in the hub communicates with field units via
carrier is set at the hub, and the RSVP Link
Frequency setting in the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
must match it. The default link frequency is set to
80.00 MHz.
carrier, use the buttons to highlight the RSVP
change the value in 0.05 MHz increments, or press
the button, enter the link frequency using the
Note: If the SSR Mode and RSVP Mode are installed on your
instrument, the link frequency can be set to different frequencies, one for
SSR Mode and one for RSVP Mode.
RSVP Test Carriers

The RSVP Mode transmits up to eight test signals at
frequencies which are set in the SST in the hub. The
settings are transmitted to field units as part of the
regular data transmissions at the RSVP Link
Frequency. All of the frequencies can be active
during a test, but it is more usual for a smaller number
to be active.
To set the test carriers, use the buttons to
highlight the SSR Test Carriers field, and use the
between ON (number displayed) or OFF (blank, no
number displayed).
4.25
Setup
RSVP C/I Threshold

The RSVP C/I Threshold sets the limit that RSVP
Mode will use to determine if the Carrier/ (Noise +
Ingress) ratio is acceptable (PASS) or inadequate
(FAIL). You can select from 1 to 80 dB. The default
threshold value is set to 10 dB.
To set the threshold, use the buttons to
highlight the RSVP C/I Threshold field, and use the
buttons to change the value in 1 dB increments,
or press the button, enter the threshold value
button.
Note: The RSVP C/I Threshold is typically set for the desired C/I for
the set top or cable modems that you use.
RSVP C/I Bandwidth

Ingress measurements, like noise measurements,
are typically referenced to a particular measurement
bandwidth. Your instrument can be set to
automatically perform this correction. You can select
from 0.100 to 8.00 MHz. The default bandwidth value
is set to 1.00 MHz.
To set the bandwidth, use the buttons to
highlight the RSVP C/I Bandwidth field, and use the
buttons to change the value in 0.10 MHz
increments, or press the button, enter the
bandwidth value using the alphanumeric keypad, and
Note: The RSVP C/I Bandwidth is typically set for the desired C/I for
the set top or cable modems that you use.
4.26
Setup
RSVP C/I Samples

To improve the repeatability of measurements, the
instrument repeats the C/I measurement from 8 to 16
times and averages the data before comparing it to
the RSVP C/I Threshold. The default number of
samples is 16 samples.
The number of samples is settable. Lower numbers
give test results the most quickly. Larger values offer
more measurement stability at the cost of more
measurement time.
To set the number of samples, use the buttons
to highlight the RSVP C/I Samples field, and then
use the button and/or the buttons to change the value in
1 sample increments.
4.27
Setup
RET Link Settings

This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s RET Link Settings. The Telemetry
Search Settings window allows you to assign up to 10 link frequencies. There are two common
methods for setting up a system with many 9581 SSTs. The first method uses a single common
link frequency and the second method uses different
telemetry frequencies in different parts of your system.
These settings are unique to your instrument and will
remain constant throughout every operation you perform.
of how to modify the RET Link Settings including:
• Method 1 - Manual Link Frequency
• Method 2 - Automatic Return Telemetry Frequency
Search
• RSVP Search (reserved for future use)
Note: SSR Mode and RSVP Mode are optional functions of the 860
DSP and 860 DSPi. To view the installed functions on your instrument,
see Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information
Mode. If you do not have SSR Mode or RSVP Mode installed in your
instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order these options
and start using them today.
4.28
Setup
Method 1 - Manual Link Frequency

The first method uses the settings from the SSR
Mode or RSVP Mode Settings and the Return
Telemetry Frequencies should be set to UNUSED.
This way all head end units transmit their telemetry
data on a single frequency no matter what node you
are on in your system. In this configuration, you can
pre-configure the instrument with the single frequency
and it will work anywhere in your system.
4.29
Setup
Method 2 - Automatic Return Telemetry Frequency Search

The second method works by the instrument
signaling the 9581 SST on the signaling telemetry
frequency and looking at each data stream for this
signal to appear. Once a signal is found, that
telemetry frequency is made the current default
frequency and the unit uses it.
To enable the automatic frequency search, you must
first enter a return telemetry frequency.
To enter a return telemetry frequency, use the
buttons to highlight any of the Return Telemetry
Frequency List fields, use the buttons to
change the value in 0.05 MHz increments, or press
the button, enter the value using the alphanumeric
keypad, and then press the button. You can
choose from 50 MHz to 92 MHz.
To set the return telemetry frequency to UNUSED,
press the button, press the button, and then
press the button.
Once you have entered at least one return telemetry
frequency, use the buttons to highlight the SSR Search field, and then use the
button and/or the buttons to change between Yes and No.
Note: The SSR Search method only works in SSR Mode using the
9581 SST with R4 firmware.
Note: The RSVP Search method is not currently supported.
4.30
Setup
VoIP Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s VoIP Settings. The Voice over IP
(VoIP) Settings window allows you to set the parameters required to test VoIP signals.
of how to modify the VoIP Settings including:
• Codec Type, Delay, and Bit Rate
• Packet Rate and Size
• Jitter Buffer Delay
• Call Length
• Maximum Latency
• Maximum Jitter
• Minimum MOS
Note: VoIP Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP. To view the
VoIP Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800)
4.31
Setup
Codec Type, Delay, and Bit Rate

The CODEC Type, CODEC Delay, and CODEC Bit
Rate settings cannot be changed manually by the
user.
These settings will automatically change based on
changes to the Packet Rate and Packet Size
settings.
The value of the CODEC Bit Rate will be followed by
an asterisk (*) when the Packet Rate and Packet
Size settings have been changed to a value that
does not meet the CODEC Type specifications.
Packet Rate and Size

These settings allow you to change the data packet
size and the rate at which data packets are sent and
received. When changing the value of this setting be
careful not to select values that do not meet the
CODEC Type specifications.
You can choose a Packet Rate between 20 and 200
msec. The default Packet Rate is 20 msec.
You can choose a Packet Size between 20 and
1000 Bytes. The default Packet Size is 160 Bytes.
To change the number of packet rate or size, use the
buttons to highlight the Packet Rate or
Packet Size field, and then use the or button
to increase the value in 10 unit increments or use the
button to decrease the value in 10 unit increments.
Note: Trilithic does not recommend changing these settings. These

settings should be adequate for performing all VoIP testing.
4.32
Setup
Jitter Buffer Delay

This setting allows you to change the amount of time
that the instrument temporarily stores arriving packets
in order to minimize delay variations. If packets arrive
too late then they are discarded.
To change the delay, use the buttons to
highlight the Jitter Buffer Delay field, and use the
or button to increase the value in 5 msec
increments or use the button to decrease the value
in 5 msec increments.
Call Length
This setting allows you to change the length of the
VoIP test call. You can choose a call length between
10 sec by 500 pkts and 40 sec by 2000 pkts. The
default setting is 20 sec by 1000 pkts.
To change the delay, use the buttons to
highlight the Call Length field, and use the or
button to increase the value in 1 msec by 50 pkts
increments or use the button to decrease the value
in 1 msec by 50 pkts increments.
Maximum Latency
This setting allows you to change the maximum
amount of time between the start of the VoIP test and
when the first data packets are received. You can
choose a latency between 0 and 400 msec. The
default setting is 140 msec.
To change the latency, use the buttons to
highlight the Max Latency field, and use the or
button to increase the value in 5 msec increments
or use the button to decrease the value in 5 msec
increments.
4.33
Setup
Maximum Jitter
This setting allows you to change the maximum
allowable jitter. You can choose a maximum jitter
between 0 msec and 400 msec. The default setting is
40 msec.
To change the value, use the buttons to
highlight the Max Jitter field, and use the or
button to increase the value in 5 msec increments
or use the button to decrease the value in 5 msec
increments.
Minimum Mean Opinion Score (MOS)

This setting allows you to change the minimum
desired quality of the voice signal. You can choose a
desired signal quality level between 2.00 and 5.00.
The default setting is 4.00.
To change the value, use the buttons to
highlight the Min MOS field, and use the or
button to increase the value in 0.10 increments or
use the button to decrease the value in 0.10
increments.
4.34
Setup
Scan Mode Settings

This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s Scan Mode Settings. The Scan
Mode/Limit Settings window allows you to assign scan test limits to your instrument. These
settings are unique to your instrument and will remain constant throughout every operation you
perform.
of how to modify the Scan Mode Settings including:
• Scan Mode Averages
• Scan Limit Set and Setting Limits
Note: Scan Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view the
Scan Mode installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800)
4.35
Setup
Multi Ch Averaging
You can set your rate of averaging for Scan Mode
directly from this setup menu. You can select from 1,
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 Times.
The default to average is 4 Times.
To change the number of averages, use the
buttons to highlight the Multi Ch Averaging field, and
use the button and/or the buttons to
increment through the possible average rates.
Single Ch Averaging
You can set your rate of averaging for Scan Mode
directly from this setup menu. You can select from 1,
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 Times.
The default to average is 4 Times.
buttons to highlight the Single Ch Averaging field,
increment through the possible average rates.
4.36
Scan Limit Set and Setting Limits
The Scan Limit Set setting allows you to toggle
between the four different limit modes you can set.
You can select from TAP LIMITS, SET LIMITS,
BLOCK LIMITS, and USER LIMITS.
Each limit mode allows you to define amplitude
standards your system must meet at the specified
location. The corresponding limits are shown below
the Min and Max column headings and will change to
the current set limit as you toggle through the various
limit modes.
To change the limit mode, use the buttons to
highlight the Scan Limit Set field, and use the button and/or the buttons to increment
through the possible limit modes.
4.37
Setup
Tap Limits
The TAP LIMITS mode allows you to define
amplitude standards your system must meet at
the Tap.
When the instrument performs a channel scan to
this limit it will tell you immediately if any channel
fails the criteria you have set.
To meet a minimum limit the measured values
must be equal to or greater than the minimum
limit. To meet a maximum limit the measured
values must be less than or equal to the maximum
limit.
• Min and Max Analog Video - sets the range for analog video channel levels.
• Min and Max Video / Audio Delta - sets the minimum and maximum allowable
• Min and Max Digital Signal - sets limits for digital channel levels.
• Max Delta System Video - sets the maximum difference allowed between the
lowest and highest levels measured for the analog video channels.
• Max Delta Adjacent Video - sets the maximum level variation between any two
adjacent video carriers.
To change the amplitude standards your system must meet at the Tap, change the Scan
Limit Set field to TAP LIMITS.
To change a limit, use the buttons to highlight desired limit field, and use the or
button to increase the limit in one unit increments or use the button to decrease the
limit in one unit increments.
4.38
Setup
Block Limits
The BLOCK LIMITS mode allows you define
the ground block.
limit.
To change the amplitude standards your system must meet at the ground block, change the
Scan Limit Set field to BLOCK LIMITS.
4.39
Setup
Set Limits
The SET LIMITS mode allows you define
the TV set outlet.
limit.
To change the amplitude standards your system must meet at the TV set outlet, change the
Scan Limit Set field to SET LIMITS.
4.40
Setup
User Limits
The USER LIMITS mode allow you to define
amplitude standards your system must meet at a
user defined point in your system.
limit.
To change the amplitude standards your system must meet at a user defined point in your
system, change the Scan Limit Set field to USER LIMITS.
4.41
Setup
CSO / CTB Settings

This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s CSO/CTB Settings. The CSO/CTB
Settings window allows you to define the offsets from the video carrier for measuring CSO and
CTB. The offsets for CSO and CTB depend on your channel plan. These settings are unique to
your instrument and will remain constant throughout every operation you perform.
This section will provide you with a basic understanding of how to modify the CSO/CTB Settings
including:
• CSO/CTB Span
• CSO/CTB Offset #1
Note: CSO/CTB Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSPi. To view

Advanced CSO/CTB Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
4.42
Setup
CSO/CTB Span
The CSO/CTB Span setting allows you to set the
total frequency span included in a CSO/CTB
measurement. Set this greater than 2 times the
largest CSO/CTB offset. The default span is set at
3.000 MHz.
To change the CSB/CTB Span, use the
buttons to highlight the CSO/CTB Span field, and
use the buttons to change the span in 0.050
MHz increments, or press the button, enter the
bandwidth using the alphanumeric keypad, and then
press the button.
Note: You should set your CSO/CTB Span according to the channel
plan you are using. See the Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Edit
Channel Plan Settings for more information on the channel plan you are
using.
4.43
Setup
CSO/CTB Offset #1
The CSO/CTB Offset #1 settings allows you to set
the #1 of 5 CSO/CTB offsets. The default offset is set
at -1.250 MHz and is designated CSO.
To change the value of the CSB/CTB Offset, use the
buttons to highlight left-most field next to CSO/
CTB Offset #1, use the buttons to change the
offset in 0.050 MHz increments, or press the
button, enter the offset using the alphanumeric
To change the CSO/CTB designation, use the
buttons to select the right-most field next to CSO/
CTB Offset #1, and then use the or button
to toggle between CSO and CTB.
Note: You should set your CSO/CTB Offset #1 according to the channel
plan you are using. See the Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Edit
using.
4.44
Setup
CSO/CTB Offset #2
at -0.750 MHz and is designated CSO.
plan you are using. See the Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Channel
Plan Settings for more information on the channel plan you are using.
4.45
Setup
CSO/CTB Offset #3
at 0.000 MHz and is designated CTB.
4.46
Setup
CSO/CTB Offset #4
at 0.750 MHz and is designated CSO.
4.47
Setup
CSO/CTB Offset #5
at 1.250 MHz and is designated CSO.
4.48
Setup
FWD Sweep Settings

This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s FWD Sweep Settings. The Forward
Sweep Settings window allows you to assemble and name the various configurations of the test
points you will encounter when performing a test in
Sweep Mode. This allows you to call up standard
configurations when sweeping, rather than having to
reenter sweep settings each time you connect to a test
point. These settings are unique to your instrument and
will remain constant throughout every operation you
perform.
of how to modify the FWD Sweep Settings including:
• Sweep Averages
• Cable Velocity Factor
• Test Point Number and Name
• High and Low Pilot Carrier Level
• TAP (Offset) Value
Note: To view the installed functions on your instrument, see Section IV:
have Sweepless Sweep Mode or Forward SpeedSweep Mode
installed in your instrument, you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to
order these options and start using them today.
Note: You should set your FWD Sweep Settings according to the
channel plan you are using. See the Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode,
using.
4.49
Setup
Sweep Averaging
This setting is used to average the values of several
consecutive sweeps to reduce display jitter. You can
select from Disabled, Low, Medium, and High. The
default averaging is Medium.
buttons to highlight the Sweep Averaging field, and
use the button and/or the buttons to
increment through the possible averages.
Note: You can also change the sweep averaging directly while using
Sweep Mode; see Section III: Service Functions, Chapter 8: Sweep
Mode, Setting Averaging Type.
Cable Velocity Factor

This setting is used to calculate the distance to fault
measurement in Sweep Mode. This calculates the
approximate distance to a serious line fault by
analyzing VSWR patterns in the sweep response.
The default cable velocity factor is 87.5%.
To change the cable velocity factor, use the
buttons to highlight the Cable Velocity Factor field,
and use the or button to increase the cable
velocity factor in 0.1% increments or use the
button to decrease the cable velocity factor in
0.1% increments.
4.50
Setup
Test Point Number and Name

You will need to enter “profiles” for each type of node
and amplifier you will be servicing.
You can enter up to 9 test point configurations. If a
profile has not been previously named, it will carry the
label, Test Point <#>, where <#> can be 1 through 9.
Each name should be a designation for a type of
node or amplifier you will be sweeping (“Acme 3”,
”Mega 5”). When sweeping, selecting the setup
information stored under this name will set the
instrument to the amplitude and coupler values that
are appropriate for this device.
To change the test point number, use the
buttons to highlight the Test Point Number field, and
use the or button to increase the test point
number or use the button to decrease the test
point number.
To change the test point name, use the buttons
to highlight the Test Point Name field, press the
button, enter the operator name using the
4.51
Setup
Low and High Pilot Value

The Low Pilot Value and High Pilot Value
Settings allow the user to set the sensitivity and
display parameters of the instrument so that when
amplifiers are set to the proper gain and tilt, the
sweep trace coincides with the middle horizontal line
of the sweep graph.
Set the pilot amplitudes to those that you would
expect when the named device is properly aligned.
These settings will be used to determine node and
amplifier gain errors.
To change the low pilot value, use the buttons
to highlight the Low Pilot Value field, and use the
or button to increase the low pilot value in 0.25
dBmV increments or use the button to decrease
the low pilot value in 0.25 dBmV increments.
To change the low pilot value, use the buttons
to highlight the High Pilot Value field, and use the
or button to increase the high pilot value in
0.25 dBmV increments or use the button to
decrease the high pilot value in 0.25 dBmV
increments.
Note: The low pilot is the first (lowest frequency) carrier marked as a Tilt
channel in the channel plan you select when using the Sweep Mode. The
high pilot is the last (highest frequency) Tilt carrier in the plan.
Note: The value you enter should be the value AHEAD of the test point
coupler. The coupler loss will be accounted for in the TAP (Offset) Value
section that follows.
4.52
Setup
TAP (Offset) Value

Test points connect through directional couplers
within the node or amplifier. The Tap values are
typically 20 dB or 30 dB, though additional losses
may be included in your connections.
This setting is the total loss in the connection
between the amplifier, or node, test point and the
input to the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi, and must include
the coupling loss of the test point, and any pads or
other in-line hardware.
This setting is individually settable for each test point
profile, and is included in the information the
instrument uses to center the graph of an aligned amplifier to the center graticule of the sweep
display.
You should repeat this process to define all of the amplifier and node test points you will be
connecting to before sweeping your distribution system.
To change the offset value, use the buttons to highlight the TAP (Offset) Value field, and
use the buttons to change the offset value in 1 dB increments, or press the button,
enter the offset value using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press the button.
Note: The TAP (Offset) Value is used in Sweep Mode only. All other
modes use the Test Point Compensation Function Menu Option.
4.53
Setup
8300 FST Channels

This setting allows the user to enable and disable the
8300 FST channels when using Sweep Mode. While
performing the sweep test with the 8300 FST
channels disabled, the instrument will skip the 8300
FST channels that are defined in the channel plan.
While performing the sweep test with the 8300 FST
enabled, the instrument will use the 8300 FST
channels that are defined in the channel plan.
To enable and disable the 8300 FST channels, use
the buttons to highlight the 8300 FST
Channels field, and use the button and/or the
buttons to change between Skip and Use.
4.54
Setup
Digital Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s
Digital Settings. The Digital (QAM) Settings window
allows you to set the parameters that affect the digital
display when using QAM Lite Mode or QAM Mode.
of how to modify the Digital Settings including:
• Symbols to Display
• MER / EVM Display
• QAM Demodulation
• BER Demodulation
• VSB Demodulation
• Error Vector Spectrum
QAM Lite or QAM Mode installed in your instrument, you may call
Note: In order for QAM Mode to tune channels correctly, you must
designate which channels are digital and the modulation used for each
channel. See the Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Edit Channel Plan
Settings for more information on the channel plan you are using.
4.55
Setup
Symbols To Display
This setting allows you to set the number of symbols
that are displayed on a constellation screen to make
the constellation more or less dense. You can select
from 1,000 to 30,000 Symbols, or DWELL (infinite
symbols).
To change the number of symbols, use the
buttons to highlight the Symbols to Display field,
and use the or button to increase the time
symbols in 1000 symbol increments or use the
button to decrease the symbols in 1000 symbol
increments.
MER / EVM Display
This setting allows you to select whether the
instrument displays MER (dB) or EVM (%).
To change how the instrument displays digital
measurements, use the buttons to highlight the
MER / EVM field, and use the button and/or the
buttons to change between MER (dB) and
EVM (%).
Note: The QAM Demodulation Setting must be set to Software (DSP)

in order for the instrument to allow the selection of EVM (%) for the
MER / EVM Display Setting.
4.56
Setup
QAM Demodulation
instrument performs hardware or software QAM
demodulation.
To change the QAM Demodulation, use the
buttons to highlight the QAM Demodulation field,
change between Hardware (EDV) and Software
(DSP).
With Hardware (EDV) selected, the 860 DSP or 860
DSPi relies on an internal card to perform QAM
demodulation calculations. With Software (DSP) selected, the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi
performs QAM demodulation calculations using its internal software. Hardware (EDV)
demodulation is more accurate, but slower than Software (DSP) demodulation.
BER Demodulation
instrument performs hardware or software BER
demodulation.
To change the BER Demodulation, use the
buttons to highlight the BER Demodulation field,
change between Hardware (EDV) and Internal
Modem.
4.57
Setup
VSB Demodulation
instrument performs hardware or software 8 VSB
demodulation.
To change the 8 VSB Demodulation, use the
buttons to highlight the VSB Demodulation
field, and use the button and/or the buttons
to change between Hardware (EDV) and Software
(DSP).
Note: Software demodulation for 8 VSB is not currently available.
Note: Hardware demodulation for EVS is not currently available.
Error Vector Spectrum

instrument performs hardware or software Error
Vector Spectrum (EVS) demodulation.
To change the Error Vector Spectrum, use the
buttons to highlight the Error Vector
Spectrum field, and use the button and/or the
buttons to change between Hardware (EDV) and
Software (DSP).
Note: Software demodulation for EVS is not currently available.
4.58
Setup
COM/NET Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s COM/NET Settings. The
Communications Settings window allows you to set the communication parameters that affect
connecting the instrument using your ethernet connection. The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped
with the ethernet connection as a standard feature. In order to use the ethernet communications on
your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Ethernet Option (CI-1, CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5).
regarding setup using WorkBench, please refer to the WorkBench operation manual.
of how to modify the COM/NET Settings including:
• Network Port
• Connection Speed
• My IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway Address
• Primary DNS Address
• Secondary DNS Address
• Activating Network
• Com 1 and Com 2 Baud Rate
Note: Contact your IT Department or Network Group to see if you should

use a static IP (fixed) address or get a dynamic IP address from a
network server. You will also need to know a valid gateway for your
system if you plan to access devices outside your network.
4.59
Setup
Network Port
This setting allows you to select the method of
external communication.
• Internal Modem - This option uses the cable
modem built into the 860 DSPi to
communicate through the RF input.
• External RJ45 - This option uses the RJ45
connector with an ethernet cable to
communicate with another device.
To change the method of external communication,
use the buttons to highlight the Network Port
field, and use the button and/or the buttons to change between Internal Modem and
External RJ45.
Connection Speed
This setting allows you to select the speed at which to
communicate when using external communication.
You can choose from 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps
connections speeds. The default connection speed is
10 Mbps.
To change the connection speed, use the
buttons to highlight the field to the right of the
Network Port field, and use the button and/or the
buttons to change between 10 Mbps and
100 Mbps.
4.60
Setup
My IP Address
This setting is a unique number which identifies your
instrument on an Ethernet, IP network. You may need
to check with your network administrator to determine
what IP address is needed. The default setting is
DHCP (Dynamic).
To change the IP address, use the buttons to
highlight the My IP Address field, press the
button, enter the IP address using the
The format of the IP address is made up of four, 3-
digit numbers separated by periods.
To set the IP address to DHCP (Dynamic), enter 0.0.0.0.
Note: If you need to connect your instrument to a different subnetwork,

your network administrator will need to supply a valid IP address.
CAUTION: If you are using DHCP and Activate Network is set to On

Startup, you will have up to two minutes after you turn on your instrument
to connect it to the network. After this time, the instrument will give up
looking for a DHCP server and will disable network functions.
Subnet Mask
This setting is a unique number which identifies the
range of IP addresses that are on your subnetwork.
You may need to check with your network
administrator to determine what address is needed.
The default setting is 0.0.0.0.
To change the subnet mask, use the buttons to
highlight the Subnet Mask field, press the button,
enter the address using the alphanumeric keypad,
and then press the button. The format of the
address is made up of four, 3-digit numbers
separated by periods.
4.61
Setup
Gateway Address
This setting is a unique number which identifies the IP
address of the network device on your subnet which
allows you to communicate with devices outside of
your network. The default setting is 0.0.0.0 which
indicates that there is no gateway and the gateway
will be discovered through DHCP.
To change the gateway address, use the
buttons to highlight the Gateway Address field,
press the button, enter the address using the
The format of the address is made up of four, 3-digit
numbers separated by periods.
Note: If you need to connect your instrument to a different subnetwork,

your network administrator will need to supply a valid gateway address.
4.62
Setup
Primary and Secondary DNS Addresses

The primary and secondary DNS addresses are
unique numbers which identify the server address of
the network device which resolves network names to
IP Addresses. The default for these parameters is
0.0.0.0.
To change the primary or secondary DNS address,
use the buttons to highlight the Pri DNS
Address or Sec DNS Address field, press the
button, enter the address name using the
The format of the DNS address is made up of four,
3-digit numbers separated by periods.
Activating Network
This setting is used to set how the network
connection is activated.
To change how the network is activated, use the
buttons to highlight the Activate Network
to change between Prompt User and On Startup.
4.63
Setup
Com 1 and Com 2 Baud Rate

This setting is used to set the transfer rate for the
external serial ports. You can choose from 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BAUD.
To change the transfer rate, use the buttons to
highlight the Com 1 Baud Rate or Com 2 Baud
Rate field, and use the button and/or the
buttons to increment through the possible transfer
rates.
4.64
Setup
Browser Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s Browser Settings. The Web Browser
Settings window allows you to set the display settings that are used in Web Browser Mode.
of how to modify the Browser Settings including:
• Home Page
• Display Settings
• Browser Cookies
Note: Web Browser Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and
Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 5: Instrument Information Mode.
If you do not have Web Browser Mode installed in your instrument, you
may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start using it
today.
4.65
Setup
Home Page
The web browser is limited to accessing the web
pages listed on its internal home page (index.html)
located on drive B.
You will need to use the WorkBench software to edit
the index.html file. This will allow you to add or
change the web pages accessible from the home
page. See your WorkBench operation manual for
further instructions.
Display Settings
These settings allow you to change the appearance
of your web browser screen by hiding or displaying
the URL Bar, Status Bar, Softkey Bar, or Title Bar.
To change the appearance of your web browser
screen, use the buttons to highlight the desired
to change between Displayed and Hidden.
Title Bar
URL Bar
Status Bar
Softkey Bar
Note: You will need to restart your instrument for these changes to take
effect.
4.66
Setup
Browser Cookies
This setting allows you to choose whether to save or
discard web browser cookies when the unit is turned
off.
To change the action taken on shutdown of the
instrument, use the buttons to highlight the
Browser Cookies field, and use the button and/
or the buttons to change between Saved on
Power Down and Lost on Power Down.
4.67
Setup
CM/CPE Settings
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s CM/CPE Settings. The CM and CPE
Settings window allows you to set the parameters required to use your cable system’s DOCSIS
network via the instrument’s internal cable modem. The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with an
internal cable modem as a standard feature. The internal cable modem is not available for the 860
DSP in any configuration.
of how to modify the CM/CPE Settings including:
• 860 DSPi CPE MAC Address
• Internal Cable Modem CPE MAC Address
• Downstream MAC Frequency
• Show Modem Info
4.68
Setup
860 DSP CPE MAC Address

To have access to your cable system’s DOCSIS network you may need to use the CPE MAC
address of a device that has been provisioned correctly.
This can be done two ways, by provisioning the CPE MAC address of the 860 DSPi on the
cable modem network or by spoofing an existing device’s CPE MAC address using the
860 DSPi.
Provisioning an 860 DSPi or spoofing a device’s CPE MAC address is essential to get the
cable modem to work properly on DOCSIS networks that requires PCs to be authenticated.
The CPE MAC address is a unique number which identifies your 860 DSPi on a cable
system’s DOCSIS network. A CPE MAC address is of the form 12-34-56-78-9A-BC and is
unique for every device on the network.
Provisioning an 860 DSPi

To use the CPE MAC address of your 860 DSPi
to connect to the cable system DOCSIS network,
use the buttons to highlight the field below
860 CPE MAC, and use the button and/or the
buttons to change the setting to Use CPE
MAC.
Note: You may have your IT Department or System Administrator

provision the CPE MAC address of the 860 DSPi on your cable
system’s DOCSIS network before this method will work.
4.69
Setup
Spoofing an External Device

The following two methods can be used to spoof
the CPE MAC address of an external device that
is provisioned correctly on the cable system’s
DOCSIS network;
• Spoof CPE MAC - Use this setting if you
plan on spoofing the same external
devices’s CPE MAC address each time
you logon to the network.
• Spoof Prompt - Use this setting if you
plan on spoofing a different external
devices’s CPE MAC address each time
you logon to the network.
Note: You can’t permanently change the CPE MAC address of the
860 DSPi, but you can temporarily override the CPE MAC address of
the 860 DSPi by spoofing an external device’s MAC address.
Spoof CPE MAC

To spoof the same external device each time you
logon to the network, use the buttons to
highlight the field below 860 CPE MAC, and use
the button and/or the buttons to change
the setting to Spoof CPE MAC.
When you select Spoof CPE MAC, use the
buttons to highlight the fields next to Spoof
CPE MAC, use the buttons to increase or
decrease the value, or press the button, enter
the value using the alphanumeric keypad, and
then press the button. Repeat this procedure for each field next to Spoof CPE MAC.
When Spoof CPE MAC is selected, the 860 DSPi will use the same external devices’s
CPE MAC address to logon to the network each time the 860 DSPi is asked to logon
using the internal cable modem.
4.70
Setup
Spoof Prompt
To spoof a different external device each time you
highlight the field below 860 CPE MAC, and use
the setting to Spoof Prompt.
If you select Spoof Prompt, the Enter PC MAC
to Spoof window will appear when the 860 DSPi
is asked to logon to the network using the internal
cable modem.
To enter the external devices’s CPE MAC
address, use the buttons to highlight the
address fields, and use the buttons to
increase or decrease the value, or press the
button, enter the value using the alphanumeric
keypad, and then press the button again.
Repeat this procedure for each address field.
Note: The 860 DSPi will automatically populate the Enter PC MAC to
Spoof window with the last CPE MAC address that you used to logon to
the network using the internal cable modem.
4.71
Setup
Internal Cable Modem MAC Address

To have access to your cable system’s DOCSIS network you may need to use the MAC
address of a modem that has been provisioned correctly.
This can be done two ways, by provisioning the MAC address of the 860 DSPi’s internal cable
modem on the cable modem network or by spoofing an existing cable modem’s MAC address
using the 860 DSPi.
Provisioning the internal cable modem of an 860 DSPi or spoofing a cable modem’s MAC
address is essential to get the cable modem to work properly on DOCSIS networks.
The MAC address is a unique number which identifies the internal cable modem of your 860
DSPi on a cable system’s DOCSIS network. A MAC address is of the form
12-34-56-78-9A-BC and is unique for every device on the network.
Provisioning the 860 DSPi’s Internal Cable Modem

To use the MAC address of your 860 DSPi’s
internal cable modem to connect to the cable
system DOCSIS network, use the buttons
to highlight the field below Modem MAC#1 and
Modem MAC#2, and use the button and/or
the buttons to change the setting to Use CM
MAC#1, Use CM MAC#2, or CM MAC Prompt.
Choosing Use CM MAC#1 or Use CM MAC#2
will allow you to use the MAC address of internal
cable modem number 1 or 2 exclusively to
connect to the network.
Note: If your system is using BPI (Base Line Privacy), you must have
your IT Department or System Administrator provision the MAC address
of the 860 DSPi’s internal cable modem on your cable system’s
DOCSIS network before this method will work.
4.72
Setup
If you select CM MAC Prompt, the Select CM

MAC to Use window will appear when the
860 DSPi is asked to logon to the network using
the internal cable modem.
To select which internal cable modem to use, use
the buttons to select the MAC#1 or
MAC#2 button, and then press the button.
Spoofing an External Cable Modem

The following two methods can be used to spoof the MAC address of an external cable
modem that is provisioned correctly on the cable system’s DOCSIS network;
• Spoof CM MAC#1 or Spoof CM MAC#2
- Use these settings if you plan on spoofing
the same external cable modem’s MAC
address each time you log on to the
network. You can spoof a cable modem
using either internal cable modem of the
860 DSPi.
• Spoof Prompt - Use this setting if you
plan on spoofing a different external cable
modem’s MAC address each time you log
on to the network.
Note: You can’t permanently change the MAC addresses of the

860 DSPi’s internal cable modems, but you can temporarily override the
MAC addresses of the 860 DSPi’s internal cable modems by spoofing
an external cable modem’s MAC address.
4.73
Setup
Spoof CM MAC#1 or Spoof CM MAC#2

To spoof the same external cable modem each
time you logon to the network, use the
buttons to highlight the field below Modem
MAC#1 and Modem MAC#2, and use the
button and/or the buttons to change the
setting to Spoof CM MAC#1 or Spoof CM
MAC#2.
When you select Spoof CM MAC#1 or Spoof
CM MAC#2, use the buttons to highlight
the fields next to Spoof CM MAC#1 or Spoof
CM MAC#2, use the buttons to increase or
decrease the value, or press the button, enter
the value using the alphanumeric keypad, and
then press the button. Repeat this procedure
for each field next to Spoof CM MAC#1 or
Spoof CM MAC#2.
When Spoof CM MAC#1 or Spoof CM MAC#2
is selected, the 860 DSPi will use the same cable
modem’s CPE MAC address to logon to the
network each time the 860 DSPi is asked to
logon using the internal cable modem.
Note: Spoofing is not allowed on systems where DOCSIS 1.1 has been
implemented and BPI is activated due to security reasons.
4.74
Setup
Spoof Prompt
To spoof a different cable modem each time you
highlight the field below Modem MAC#1 and
Modem MAC#2, and use the button and/or
the buttons to change the setting to Spoof
Prompt.
If you select Spoof Prompt, the Enter CM MAC
to Spoof window will appear when the 860 DSPi
is asked to logon to the network using the internal
cable modem.
To enter the cable modem’s MAC address, use
the buttons to highlight the address fields,
use the buttons to increase or decrease the
value, or press the button, enter the value
using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press
the button. Repeat this procedure for each
address field.
Note: The 860 DSPi will automatically populate the Enter CM MAC to
Spoof window with the last cable modem MAC address that you used to
logon to the network using the internal cable modem.
4.75
Setup
Modem MAC Frequency

This settings allows you to accelerate the modem
logon process by entering the center frequency of the
downstream DOCSIS carrier. You can select from
91.000 to 1000.000 MHz, or Search (search all
frequencies).
To change the search frequency, use the
buttons to highlight the Modem MAC#1 or Modem
MAC#2 field, and use the buttons to change the
downstream frequency in increments equal to your
channel spacing, or press the button, enter the
downstream frequency using the alphanumeric
To search all the downstream frequencies, set the
Modem MAC#1 or Modem MAC#2 field to Search
by entering 0.
4.76
Setup
Wi-Fi Settings
The user can configure up to 3 default Wi-Fi
configurations (called zones) using the Setup menu.
The zone selected when the user leaves setup is the
newly active zone that the meter will attempt to use the
next time Wi-Fi is activated.
To configure the Wi-Fi zone, use the buttons to
highlight Wi-Fi on the Instrument Information screen and
modulation type by pressing the corresponding
Use the buttons to highlight the desired Wi-Fi

zone parameter setting and press the button to
change the value.
4.77
Setup
Learn Channel Plan Settings

Although the instrument comes ready-to-use from the factory, you will need to identify your channel
plan on the instrument before you begin using it. This section will show you how to adjust your
instrument’s Learn Channel Plan Settings. The Learn Channel Plan Menu window allows you
to set the parameters required to quickly identify and learn a channel plan configuration on a
system.
of how to modify the Learn Channel Plan Settings
including:
• Base Channel Plan
• Low and High Level Limit
• Start and Stop Frequency
• Learned Plan Name
Note: Although you can build basic channel plans in the instrument, it is
more convenient to use the WorkBench software to create complex
channel plans. For instructions regarding setup using WorkBench,
please refer to the WorkBench operation manual.
4.78
Setup
Base Channel Plan

To create a channel plan or to use an existing base
channel plan without modifications, you will need to
select the plan from the list of the unit’s default plans.
Your instrument is equipped with several default base
channel plans which may include NCTA, IRC, HRC,
U2, U1, PAL_D, PAL_B, NCTA870, or NCTA1000.
You may use either an existing base plan or create
your own customized channel plan.
To set the base channel plan, use the buttons
to highlight the Base Channel Plan field, and use
the button and/or the buttons to increment
through the possible base channel plans.
When the base channel plan that you want to model
your learned channel plan from is displayed, use the
buttons to highlight the Learned Plan Name
field, press the button, enter the channel plan
name using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press
the button.
4.79
Setup
Low and High Level Limits

The Low Level Limit setting is used to set the
minimum level required to qualify as an active
channel. Set this value from 5 to 10 dB below the
levels on the system test point you will use to learn
your channel plan.
The High Level Limit setting excludes signals higher
than the set limit. Use this only if you have high level
signals that you want to eliminate from your Learned
Plan.
To change the limits, use the buttons to
highlight the Low Level Limit or High Level Limit
field, and use the or button to increase the level
in 1 dBmV increments or use the button to
decrease the time difference in 1 dBmV increments.
Note: Digital signals will be measured using a 300 kHz bandwidth,

causing them to measure about 10 dB low. You will need to set the Low
Level Limit to accommodate this.
Note: Be sure the High Level Limit is set at least 5 to 10 dB above the
highest signal level you expect to see.
4.80
Setup
Start and Stop Frequency

The Start Frequency parameter sets the lowest
frequency to scan for the active channels and the
Stop Frequency sets the highest frequency to scan.
It is important to set the Start Frequency. You only
need to set the Stop Frequency if you intentionally
want to eliminate active channels at the high end of
the frequency spectrum.
To change the frequency range, use the
buttons to highlight the Start Frequency or Stop
Frequency field, and use the buttons to
change the frequency in 1.000 MHz increments, or
press the button, enter the frequency using the
Note: Any channels lower than the set Low Level Limit or higher than
the set High Level Limit WILL NOT be included when the instrument
learns the channel plan. Accordingly, any channels below the Start
Frequency or above the Stop Frequency WILL NOT be included
when the instrument learns the channel plan.
4.81
Setup
Learn Channel Plan

Once you have completed making modifications to
the new channel plan’s parameters, press the Learn
Softkey.
In the message bar at the bottom of the screen you
will see the instrument download, scan and read your
current channel plan.
When the tests are completed, your instrument will
store the learned channel plan in its nonvolatile
memory so you can access it from the operation
menus.
CAUTION: Even if you make no modifications to a base channel plan,

you still must select the base channel plan, assign a unique name to it
and then have your instrument “learn” the plan in order for the unit to
access the plan in the operation menus.

The Function Menu can be accessed by pressing
the button while in the Learn Channel Plan
Menu window.
The following Function Menu Options can be
accessed while the Learn Channel Plan Menu
window and are described in Section I: The
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
4.82
Setup

Although the instrument comes ready-to-use from the factory, you may need to edit a channel plan.
This section will show you how to adjust your instrument’s Edit Channel Plan Settings. The Edit
Channel Plan Menu window allows you to edit the channel plan parameters that are configured
on your system.
of how to modify the Edit Channel Plan Settings
including:
• Loading a Channel Plan to Edit
• Saving Channel Plans
• Deleting Channel Plans
• Selecting a Channel Number and Channel Usage
• Changing Channel Name
• Channel Type
• Channel Details
• Video / Center
• Audio / Digital Bandwidth
• SAP Symbol Rate
• Tilt, C/N, HUM, and Percent Modulation Settings
Note: If you want to edit a channel plan stored in your instrument, you
should use Edit Channel Plan Settings to set up your digital channel
specifications AFTER you have used Learn Channel Plan
Settings.
Note: Although you can build basic channel plans in the instrument, it is
more convenient to use the companion software WorkBench to create
complex channel plans. For instructions regarding setup using
WorkBench, please refer to the WorkBench operation manual.
4.83
Setup
Loading a Channel Plan to Edit

In order to edit a channel you will first need to select
which channel plan you want to edit.
Press the Load softkey, use the

buttons to highlight an available channel plan on your
instrument, and then select the button.
The basic parameters for the specified channel plan
will be displayed in the edit fields.
Note: You may have to use the MORE... softkey to be able to see the
Load softkey.
Saving Channel Plans

To save a channel plan with the same name after you
have made any desired changes to a channel plan,
press the Save softkey. “Channel Plan Saved” will
be displayed in the message bar.
You may save changes at any time by pressing the
Save softkey. However, it is only necessary to save
changes before the instrument is turned off.
Save softkey.
CAUTION: Any changes made and not saved will be lost when the
instrument is turned off.
4.84
Setup
To save a channel plan with a new file name after you

have made any desired changes to a channel plan,
press the Save As softkey, enter the file name using
the alphanumeric keypad, and then press the
button.
If you have made any changes to a channel plan and

you press the button while in the Edit Plan
window, you will be prompted to save your channel
plan. Use the buttons to select either Yes or
No, and then press the button.
Deleting Channel Plans

To delete a channel plan, press the Delete softkey,
use the buttons to highlight an available
channel plan on your instrument, and then select the
button.
Delete softkey.
4.85
Setup
Selecting a Channel Number and Channel Usage

To select a channel for editing, use the buttons
to highlight left-most field next to Channel Number,
use the buttons to change the channel number
in one channel increments, or press the button.
To enable and disable channel numbers, use the
buttons to highlight right-most field next to
Channel Number, use the buttons to change
between USE and SKIP.
Note: When editing any parameter, you can use the Ch Up or Ch Down
softkeys to change the channel number within a selected channel plan.
Channel Name
You may label each channel for easier identification
(such as HBO, DISN, USA, TBS, etc.). To edit the
channel name, use the buttons to select the
Channel Name field, press the button, enter the
channel name using the alphanumeric keypad, and
Note: The channel name supports only eight characters so make sure
you use letters which will accurately identify the channel for you.
4.86
Setup
Channel Type
The following channel types are available for your
instrument; Custom / CW, Digital, NTSC, PAL B, D,
G, H, I, K, N, and M, SECAM B, D, G, H, I, K, and L.
To change the channel type, use the buttons to
highlight the Channel Type field, and use the
button and/or the buttons to increment through
the possible channel types.
Channel Details
The following channel details are available for your
instrument when the Channel Type field is set to
anything but Digital; No Scrambling, Sync
Suppressed, Sync Sup. w/o field, Sync Sup.
w/o Vert., and Split Sync w/o Sup.
The following channel details are available for your
instrument when the Channel Type field is set to
Digital; QPSK-Annex A, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256
QAM-Annex A, 64 and 256 QAM-Annex B.
To change the channel details, use the buttons
to highlight the Channel Details field, and use the
button and/or the buttons to increment through the possible channel details types.
4.87
Setup
Video / Center
To edit the video carrier frequency for analog
channels or channel center frequency for digital
channels, use the buttons to highlight the
Video / Center field, press the button, enter the
press the button.
Audio / Dig BW
To edit the audio frequency for analog channels or the
digital bandwidth for digital channels, use the
buttons to highlight the Audio / Dig BW field, press
the button, enter the frequency using the
4.88
Setup
SAP / Symbol Rate

To edit the secondary audio programming carrier
frequency or symbol rate of digital modulation, use
the buttons to highlight the SAP / Symbol
Rate field, press the button, enter the frequency
button.
Tilt, C/N, HUM, and Percent Modulation Settings

The Tilt, C/N, Hum, Percent Modulation settings are
all enabled and disabled in the same way.
To change the desired setting, use the buttons
to highlight the Tilt, C/N, Hum, or MOD field, and use
between Yes and No.
Note: C/N, HUM, and Modulation are used for analog video only.
Note: These tests are used in conjunction with Auto Test Macros.
4.89
Setup

The Function Menu can be accessed by pressing
the button while in the Edit Plan Menu window.
The following Function Menu options can be
accessed while the Edit Plan Menu window:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Insert Channel
• Append Channel
• Delete Channel

The following functions are described in Section I: The Basics, Chapter 6: Basic
Function Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
Insert Channel
If needed you can insert a new channel into your
channel plan.
buttons to highlight Insert Channel, and
then press the button. You may also select
Insert Channel by pressing .
The new channel will be inserted in the first
available channel location below the currently
selected channel number.
4.90
Setup
Append Channel
If needed you can append a new channel to the
end of your channel plan.
buttons to highlight Append Channel, and
Append Channel by pressing .
The new channel will be appended to the end of
the selected channel plan.
Delete Channel
If needed you can delete an existing channel from
your channel plan.
To use this option to delete the currently selected
channel, press the button, use the
buttons to highlight Delete Channel, and
Delete Channel by pressing .
The new channel will be appended to the end of
the selected channel plan.
4.91
Setup
Create Location Settings

Although the instrument comes ready-to-use from the factory, you may need to store unique
specifications for certain locations in your system. This section will show you how to adjust your
instrument’s Create Location Settings. The Edit Location window provides a method to tag
data loss with information about the location at which the data is taken. These are helpful settings,
but are not required.
of how to modify the Create Location Settings
including:
• Selecting a Location Type
• Location Area and Amplifier ID
• Power Configuration
• Feeder Configuration
• Trunk Termination
• Voltage Setting
• Reverse Pad
• Reverse Equalizer
• Forward Pad
• Forward Equalizer
• Saving Location Settings
4.92
Setup
Location Type
You can identify a particular location in your cable
system for future reference. The location type may
include: Headend, Trunk Amp, Line Extender,
Fiber Node, or Field Test. Use the Field Test for
any location that does not fall into a specific type.
To change the location type, use the buttons to
highlight the Location Type field, and use the
buttons to increment through the possible location
types.
Location Area and Amplifier ID

You may also want to create a unique name for the
location area and the amplifier ID.
To change the location area or amplifier ID, use the
buttons to highlight the Location Area or
Amplifier ID field, press the button, enter the
name using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press
the button.
4.93
Setup
Power Configuration
You can specify the power configuration for this
location. The following power configurations are
available for your instrument; In, Out or Through.
To change the power configuration, use the
buttons to highlight the Power Config field, and use
the buttons to increment through the possible
power configurations.
Feeder Configuration
You can specify the feeder configuration for this
location. The feeder configuration can be specified
as any number between 1 and 9.
To change the feeder configuration, use the
buttons to highlight the Feeder Config field, and use
the buttons to increment through the possible
feeder configurations.
Trunk Termination
You can specify if this location has a trunk
termination.
To specify whether this location has a trunk
termination, use the buttons to highlight the
Trunk Termination field, and use the buttons
to change between Yes and No.
4.94
Setup
Voltage Setting
You can specify the voltage setting for this location.
The following voltage settings are available for your
instrument; Low, Medium, or High.
To change the voltage setting, use the buttons
to highlight the Voltage Setting field, and use the
buttons to increment through the possible
voltage settings.
Reverse Pad
You can specify the reverse pad setting for this
location.
To change the reverse pad settings, use the
buttons to highlight the Reverse Pad field, and use
the buttons to change the setting in 1 dB
increments.
Reverse Equalizer
You can specify the reverse equalizer setting for this
location.
To change the reverse equalizer settings, use the
buttons to highlight the Reverse Equalizer
field, and use the buttons to change the setting
in 1 dB increments.
4.95
Setup
Forward Pad
You can specify the forward pad setting for this
location.
To change the forward pad settings, use the
buttons to highlight the Forward Pad field, and use
the buttons to change the setting in 1 dB
increments.
Forward Equalizer
You can specify the forward equalizer setting for this
location.
To change the forward equalizer settings, use the
buttons to highlight the Forward Equalizer
field, and use the buttons to change the setting
in 1 dB increments.
Saving Location Settings

When you are done changing all of the location
settings, press the button. The Save Location File
window will appear, use the alphanumeric keypad to
enter the file name of the location file, and then press
the button.
4.96
Setup

button while in the Instrument Setup Mode.
The following Function Menu Options can be accessed
while in Instrument Setup Mode and are described in
Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
4.97

+
Power 3. Power Management Mode 3
Introduction
Your instrument is equipped with both a battery and an AC power adaptor. The battery life is
approximately four hours for continuous operation and can be extended when used intermittently.
The Power Management Mode allows you to better manage the power consumption of you
instrument to prolong the time needed between charging. The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi
come equipped with the Power Management Mode as a standard feature.
understanding of how to use Power Management
Mode including:
• Choosing Power Scheme
• Processor Speed
• Backlight Level
• Unit Off Timer
• Backlight Timer
• USB Power
this mode.
4.98
+
Power
Choosing a Power Scheme

This setting allows you to choose from pre-configured power schemes in order to conserve battery
usage.
To change the power scheme, use the buttons to highlight the Power Scheme field, and
use the buttons to increment through the possible power schemes. You can select from High
(Fastest), Normal, Low (Efficient), and Custom.
• High (Fastest) - This setting allows the
instrument to operate using all options at their
highest capacity and fastest speed. This is ideal
when the AC power adaptor is plugged into AC
power. The default settings of this power scheme
are; Processor Speed = 2X and Backlight
Level = 16.
• Normal - This setting is the typical power
scheme. The default settings of this power
scheme are; Processor Speed = 1X and
Backlight Level = 10.
• Low (Efficient) - This setting is your most
efficient option. If you need to use the instrument
for an extended period of time before recharging,
this option will extend your battery life. The default
settings of this power scheme are; Processor
Speed = 1X and Backlight Level = OFF.
• Custom - This setting allows you to customize
your power management settings by manually
setting the Processor Speed and Backlight
Level yourself.
4.99
+
Power
Setting Processor Speed

The processor speed is the level at which your
instrument should process data. The processor speed
can only be changed when the Power Scheme is set to
Custom.
To change the processor speed, use the buttons
to highlight the Processor Speed field, and use the
buttons to change between 1X and 2X.
• 1X - This setting is used to conserve battery
power.
• 2X - This is the default setting.
Setting Backlight Level

This setting is the level of brightness of your instrument’s
display. The backlight level can only be changed when
the Power Scheme is set to Custom. On older
instruments, you can choose a backlight level between
Off and 28. On newer instruments, you can choose a
backlight level of On or Off.
To change the backlight level, use the buttons to
highlight the Backlight Level field, and use the
buttons to increment through the possible backlight
levels.
• If you are working outdoors in direct light choose
a lower number.
• If you are working inside or in dark environments choose a larger number.
4.100
+
Power
Unit Off Timer

This setting is used to turn off your instrument after it has
been idle for a specified period of time.
In order to conserve battery power, it is recommended to
change this setting to automatically turn off the instrument
within a particular amount of idle time. You can choose
from Disabled to 240 minutes.
To change the unit off timer, use the buttons to
highlight the Unit Off Timer field, and use the
buttons to change the time in 1 minute increments.
Note: Although this option will turn off your instrument after a specified
period of time, when you power it on again, for your convenience it will
bring you to the exact same screen it was on when it powered off.
Note: This timer setting does not apply when the instrument is being
powered through the charge cube.
Backlight Timer
This setting is used to turn off the display screen’s
backlight after your instrument has been idle for a
specified period of time.
In order to conserve battery power, it is recommended to
change this setting to automatically turn off the display
screen’s backlight within a particular amount of idle time.
You can choose from Disabled to 240 minutes.
To change the backlight timer, use the buttons to
highlight the Backlight Timer field, and use the
buttons to change the time in 1 minute increments.
Note: This timer setting does not apply when the instrument is being
powered through the charge cube.
4.101
+
Power
USB Power
This setting is used to turn the USB power on and off.
To toggle the instrument USB power between on and off,
use the buttons to highlight the USB Power field,
and use the buttons to toggle between on and off.

button while in the Power Management Mode.
while in Power Management Mode and are described
in Section I: The Basics, Chapter 6: Basic Function
Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
4.102
FILES 4. Explore Files Mode 4

Introduction
The Explore Files Mode allows you to view the data log files and unit configurations that are
saved on Flash Drive B. These files include; learned channel plans, screen saves, data logs and
text files. The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Power Management Mode
as a standard feature.
Note: Your instrument has two drives, Flash Drive B is accessible,

Flash Drive A is reserved for the instrument’s firmware and calibration
files and is not accessible.

understanding of how to use Explore Files Mode
including:
• Previewing Files
• Deleting Files
• Supported File Types
this mode.
4.103
FILES
Previewing Files
The Explore Files Mode displays a list of files stored on
Flash Drive B.
Use the buttons to navigate through the list.

The instrument will display 10 files in the list on a screen
at one time. You can page back a forth through the list
using the Page Up or Page Down softkeys.
To preview a file, highlight the desired file name then
press the button.
A thumbnail preview will appear giving you information
about the files contents.
The file parameters are displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the screen.
Note: Some file types cannot be previewed, including log files.
Deleting Files
To delete a file, use the buttons to highlight the
desired file name then press the softkey.
• The Preview/Delete function menu will open.
• Use the buttons to select Preview, and
Note: Before deleting a file be sure to preview the file and consult the file
types list to be sure that you have the selected the correct file.
4.104
FILES
Supported File Types

The following is a list of extensions the 860 DSP uses for saving information:
Extension File Type

Base Channel plan (contains all channels for a given plan used for
.base
learning a channel plan)
.ber BER Data Log
.bmpz Compressed Bitmap Screen Save
.c2n C/N Data Log
.cso CSO/CTB Data Log
.dat Temporary Cache files used by the web browser
.dom % MOD Data Log
.fdr FDR Data Log
.fm FM Deviation Data Log
.fswp Sweep Data Log
.gif Web graphic file
.html Web browser Source File
.hum hum Data Log
.ini User settings (deleting this file returns the 860 to factory default)
.lcd Screen save
.jpg Web graphic file
.leak Leakage Data Log
.lev Level Data Log
.log Macro results
.mac Autotest macro (deleting this file will remove the macro)
.ping PING Data Log
.plan Learned or user edited channel plan
4.105
FILES
Extension File Type

.png Web graphic file
.qam QAM Data Log
.qaml QAM Light Data Log
.qevs QAM EVS Data Log
.rout Trace Route Data Log
.rsa RSA Sweep Data Log
.rswp SSR Data Log
.rtst RSVP Data Log
.scan Scan Data Log
.spec Spectrum Data Log
.sref Sweep Reference
.stat CM Stat Data Log
.thru Thru Put Data Log
.tilt TILT Data Log
.traf TraffiControl Data Log
.txt Text
.vits VITS Data Log
.vrtp VoIP Data Log
.wifi Wi-Fi Survey Data Log
.wlog Web Browser Data Log
4.106
FILES

button while in the File Explorer Mode.
while in File Explorer Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Restore Defaults
• Restore Icons

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
4.107
FILES
Restore Factory Default Settings

If needed you can reset your instrument to the original
factory default settings.
buttons to highlight Restore Defaults, and then
press the button. You may also select Restore
Defaults by pressing .
Restore Defaults window will open.
• Use the buttons to select Yes or No,
CAUTION: Setting to factory defaults will delete most user settings such
as active channel plan, limits, display units etc.
4.108
FILES
Restore Icons
If needed you can reset your icons to the original
factory default icons.
buttons to highlight Restore Icons, and then
press the button. You may also select Restore
Icons by pressing .
Restore Icons window will open.
• Use the buttons to select Yes or No,
Note: Icons can be customized using the WorkBench companion

software. For instructions, see your WorkBench Operation Manual.
Note: After a firmware upgrade, you may need to restore icons to see
any new icons.
CAUTION: Restoring icons will delete any user set icons. YOU WILL
NOT BE ABLE TO RETRIEVE ANY CUSTOMIZED ICONS AFTER
REVERTING TO FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS.
4.109
i
Info 5. Instrument Information Mode 5

Introduction
The Instrument Information Mode allows you to view information specific to your instrument
such as firmware revision version, calibration date and options installed in your instrument. This is
a useful resource when upgrading your instrument or just referencing communications
specifications. The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Instrument
Information Mode as a standard feature.
understanding of how to use Instrument Information
Mode including:
• Version Info
• Calibration Info
• Communications Info
• Memory Info
• RF Option Info
• NET Option Info
• Cable Modem Info
• Performing a ScanDisk
• Activating Rf Options
• Activating Net Options
Note: All information displayed in the Instrument Information Mode is

static and is to be used as a reference only. To edit any settings you will
need to use the Instrument Setup Mode.
this mode.
4.110
i
Info
Version Info
The Version Info field provides details on the version of
firmware installed in your instrument. This information
will be helpful if you are updating your firmware or
upgrading your instrument’s option package.
To view the version info of your instrument, use the
buttons to highlight the Version Info field.
Note: When you download firmware updates from the web site or using
WorkBench software, this information will be automatically updated.
Calibration Info
The Calibration Info field provides recorded details of
the last time your instrument was calibrated. This
information will be helpful if you are sending your
instrument in to the factory for periodic maintenance.
To view the calibration info of your instrument, use the
buttons to highlight the Calibration Info field.
Note: When your instrument is sent in for calibration, this

information will be automatically updated. You should schedule your
instrument for calibration every two years.
4.111
i
Info
Communication Info
The Communication Info field displays details on the
MAC address and various IP and server setup
information on your instrument. This information is
helpful for quick reference of your current
communications settings.
To view the communication info of your instrument, use
the buttons to highlight the Communication Info
field.
Note: This information can be edited from the Instrument Setup Mode
and will be automatically updated.
Memory Info
The Memory Info field displays details of the memory
available and used on your instrument. This information
displays the amount of hard disk space available on your
instrument.
To view the memory info of your instrument, use the
buttons to highlight the Memory Info field.
Note: This information is automatically updated as files are saved and

stored in the instrument.
4.112
i
Info
RF Option Info
RF Option Info displays details of the current RF
options available on your instrument. This information
provides a reference of the types of RF options available
to use and the types of RF options you can install on your
instrument.
To view the RF option info of your instrument, use the
buttons to highlight the RF Option Info field.
Note: Options can be added after the initial purchase. For more
information, call your sales representative or Trilithic at 800-344-2412.
Note: This information is automatically updated as options are added to

your instrument.
NET Option Info

NET Option Info displays details of the current NET
options available on your instrument. This information
provides a reference of the types of NET options
available to use and the types of NET options you can
install on your instrument.
To view the NET option info of your instrument, use the
buttons to highlight the NET Option Info field.
Note: Options can be added after the initial purchase. For more
information, call your sales representative or Trilithic at 800-344-2412.
Note: This information is automatically updated as options are added to

your instrument.
4.113
i
Info
Cable Modem Info

If you have the internal cable modem installed in your
instrument, and the internal cable modem is selected as
the communication device, the Cable Modem Info field
will display details on your internal cable modem
settings. This information is helpful for quick reference of
your current modem settings.
To view the cable modem info of your instrument, use the
buttons to highlight the Cable Modem Info field.
Performing a ScanDisk
To scan your Flash Drive A or Flash Drive B for errors,
press the Scandisk softkey, use the buttons to
highlight Drive A Only or Drive B Only, and then press
the button. You may also select Drive A Only or
Drive B Only by pressing or .
The following messages may appear in the message bar
at the bottom of the screen;
• ScanDisk Complete with No errors - This will
be displayed if there are no errors on the selected
drive.
• ScanDisk Completed, Requires Firmware
Upgrade - This will be displayed if there are
errors on the Flash Drive A. Some configuration
files may be corrupted, it is recommended that
you upgrade your firmware. In some instances the
instrument’s calibration files may be corrupted. If
this occurs, you will need to return your instrument
to the factory for re-calibration.
• ScanDisk Completed, Requires
Reconfiguration - This will be displayed if there
are errors on Flash Drive B. Normally, no user intervention is needed. In some instances
a customized setting or channel plan may be corrupted. If this occurs, you will need to
reconfigure that feature.
4.114
i
Info
Activating Rf Options
If you purchased an option after your instrument was
initially shipped, you will need to activate the option on
your instrument.
Press the Rf Option softkey to display a list of all the Rf
options available on your instrument. Active Rf options
are indicated by an asterisk (*) next to the option name.
Use the buttons to highlight the name of the option

to be activated and press the button. The Enter
Option Code window will appear. Enter the option code
button. The Enter Option Code window will only
appear when the highlighted option has not yet been
installed.
Note: Options may also require additional hardware be installed. Check

with your sales representative or call Trilithic at 800-344-2412 for more
information.
Note: The option code is a unique activation number that is specifically

generated for your instrument. You should have received this code with
your order for new options. If you are missing this code, contact Trilithic at
800-344-2412.
4.115
i
Info
Activating Net Options

If you purchased an option after your instrument was
initially shipped, you will need to activate the option on
your instrument.
Press the Net Option softkey to display a list of all the Net
options available on your instrument. Active Net options
are indicated by an asterisk (*) next to the option name.
Use the buttons to highlight the name of the option

to be activated and press the button. The Enter
Option Code window will appear. Enter the option code
button. The Enter Option Code window will only
appear when the highlighted option has not yet been
installed.
Note: Options may also require additional hardware be installed. Check

with your sales representative or call Trilithic at 800-344-2412 for more
information.
Note: The option code is a unique activation number that is specifically

generated for your instrument. You should have received this code with
your order for new options. If you are missing this code, contact Trilithic at
800-344-2412.
4.116
i
Info
Unit ID
The Unit ID option allows you to see the instrument serial
number.
To use this option, press the Unit ID softkey. The unit
serial number will be displayed. To exit the window press
the button.
4.117
i
Info

button while in the Instrument Information Mode.
while in Instrument Information Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Reboot Unit

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
Reboot Unit
If needed you can reboot your instrument.
buttons to highlight Reboot Unit, and then
press the button. You may also select Reboot
Unit by pressing .
4.118
860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Cable Analyzer
Section V: Utility Functions

1. Utility Functions Overview 1

Introduction
The instrument enables you to select from several Utility Functions. The instruments features
several Utility Functions which come with the instruments and may have one or more optional
functions.
This section will provide you with instructions on how to utilize the functions available in the Utility
menu of the instrument.
may be customized and therefore may differ from the Utility menu
See the WorkBench Operation Manual for more details.
860 DSP 860 DSPi

Mode Description
Option Option
Displays the month and day of the current year. Standard Standard
Calendar
Calendar
Enables the user to reference technical notes or

text documents that have been created on a PC
using the WorkBench Software or a text editor Standard Standard
Notepad
application, and loaded from a PC using the
Notepad WorkBench Software.
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Section V: Utility Functions
5.2
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
Provides basic math functions. Standard Standard

CALC
Calculator
Allows the user to display open and closed work

order tasks. These work orders can be created
using Trilithic Data Manager (TDM), CSG Standard Standard
TASKS
Workforce Express, or other third party workforce
Tasks management systems.
Allows the user to look at any line on an Analog

(NTSC) Cable TV Channel. This is useful for
Standard PP-1
LINE checking your line blanker or test signal line
inserter device for proper operation.
Line Viewer
Provides a method of using the internal cable
Rf modem as a desktop modem by allowing a
Net
customers PC to connect to the external RJ-45 port
CM Thru N/A Standard
and gain Internet access through the internal cable
Cable modem.
Modem Thru NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSP, SEE NOTE 1
Provides a simple, convenient and accurate tool for
determining the distance to cable faults. The option FDR and PP-1, FDR
works by sending a sweep into the cable and Return and Return
FDR analyzing the complex reflected wave to determine Transmitter Transmitter
the distance to various sources of reflection Board Board
FDR (opens, shorts, splitters, etc.).
An operating function that is bundled with the SSR

PP-1 and
Mode and RSVP Mode that configures the 860 SR-1 or
SR-1 or
Source DSPi to function as a return frequency signal VP-1 or
VP-1 or
Source source with settable signal frequency, amplitude, FDR/RSA
FDR/RSA
Generator and modulation.
5.3
860 DSP 860 DSPi
Mode Description
Option Option
Generates a QPSK signal or a 16 or 64 QAM

signal (5 to 42 MHz) at a test point that can be
QAM Src analyzed in the headend displayed using a bar N/A Standard
Upstream graph.
QAM Source NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSP, SEE NOTE 1
Provides the ability to survey available access

points, or to access a network to perform tests
PP-1 and
such as ping, trace route, throughput, VoIP, and N/A
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi
verification of browser functionality.
Wi-Fi NOT AVAILABLE FOR 860 DSP, SEE NOTE 1
Note 1: Although this icon will appear on the 860 DSP, this mode is not
available for the 860 DSP. The 860 DSP must be upgraded to an 860
DSPi by installing an internal DOCSIS 2.0 or DOCSIS 3.0 modem to
access this mode.
5.4
and Hardware.
used in the 860 DSPi, so be sure to review Section I: The Basics, Chapter 4: Basic Navigation
To use some Utility Functions, you may have to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have
section.
To use some Utility Functions you will need to connect your instrument to your cable system.
5.5
Calendar 2. Calendar Mode 2

Introduction
The Calendar Mode displays the current month and day (indicated with parentheses) by default.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Calendar Mode as a standard
feature.
of how to use Calendar Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Changing Months
this mode.
Required Setup
To use Calendar Mode, you will need to set the current date, see Section IV: Setup Functions,
Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Global Settings.
Changing Months
To change the month that is displayed, press the buttons to cycle through the months in the
current year.
5.6
Notepad 3. Notepad Mode 3

Introduction
The Notepad Mode enables you to reference technical notes or text messages which have been
created on a PC using the WorkBench software or a text editor application, and loaded from a PC
using the WorkBench software.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with
the Notepad Mode as a standard feature. The
Notepad Mode can be configured to run as a legacy
version of the application, or can be configured to run
through the instrument’s web browser. The legacy
Notepad Mode is discussed in the following sections;
the web browser Notepad Mode is discussed in the final
section of this chapter.
of how to use Notepad Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Opening Text Files
• Changing Display Font Sizes
this mode.
Required Setup
To use Notepad Mode, you are not required to perform any setup procedures.
5.7
Notepad
Opening Text Files

To open a text file you have downloaded from a PC,
press the Open softkey, use the buttons to
highlight the file you want to view, and then press the
button to open the highlighted text file.
Use the buttons to scroll through the text file.
Note: You will need the companion software, WorkBench to download

any text files into your instrument. For instructions using WorkBench
software, please see the WorkBench operation manual.
Changing Display Font Size

To change the size of the font that is displayed on your
instrument in the Notepad Mode, press the Font
softkey, use the buttons to highlight the desired font
size and then press the button.
5.8
Notepad

button while in the Notepad Mode.
while in Notepad Mode and are described in Section I:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
Web Browser Notepad

The Legacy Notepad Mode can only open text files,
whereas the Web Browser Notepad can open text
files, HTML files, and image files. To change
configuration settings, refer to the Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Global
Settings, Notepad Utility section of this manual.
The Legacy Notepad Mode functions the same as the
instrument’s web browser, which is detailed in Section
II: Installer Functions, Chapter 14: Web Browser
Mode.
5.9
CALC 4. Calculator Mode 4

Overview
To use the calculator. Enter the desired number and mathematical function using the
alphanumeric keypad, and then press the button to compute the solution.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with the Calculator Mode as a standard
feature.
of how to use Calculator Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Performing Calculations
this mode.
Required Setup
To use Calculator Mode, you are not required to perform any setup procedures.
5.10
CALC
Performing Calculations
The following buttons represent the functions shown on
the calculator screen.
• The ... number buttons correspond to the
alphanumeric buttons.
• The button is used to clear computations.
• The button is used as the decimal point.
Note: To enter decimals such as .5, .25, .73, etc., you will need to press
the button before you enter the decimal.
• The button is used to equal (=) computations.
• The arrow buttons correspond to the calculator symbols for multiplication (x),
and division (/), addition (+), subtraction (-).
• The +/- softkey is used to change a calculated number to a negative or positive.
5.11
TASKS 5. Tasks Mode 5

Introduction
The Tasks Mode allows the user to display open and closed work order tasks. These work orders
can be created using Trilithic Data Manager (TDM), CSG Workforce Express, or other third party
workforce management systems.
The basic 860 DSP and 860 DSPi come equipped with
the Tasks Mode as a standard feature.
of how to use Tasks Mode including:
• Required Setup
• View Task Details
• New Task
• Close Task
• ReOpen Task
• Delete Task
this mode.
Required Setup
To use Tasks Mode, you will need to set the current date, see Section IV: Setup Functions,
Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Global Settings. You will also need to enable Tasks Mode in
the instrument setup; see Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode,
Measurement Settings, Data Log Attachments. The value must be set to Tasks or Locations +
Tasks.
In order to use the Tasks Mode, you will need to install Trilithic Data Manager (TDM), SG
Workforce Express, or some other third party workforce management system.
5.12
TASKS
Viewing Task Details

To view details of a specific task, use the buttons to
highlight the task you want to view, and then press the
button. The Task window will open. When done
viewing test details, press the button.

button while in the Tasks Mode.
while in Tasks Mode;
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Close Task File
• ReOpen Task File
• Delete Task File
• Task ID Length

Menu Options;
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
5.13
TASKS
New Task File

This option is used to create a new task.
To use this option highlight the New Task File option,
press the button.
The Function Menu will close and the Create New

Task window will open. Use the ... buttons to
enter a task ID number, and select the button. The
instrument will return to the Task Manager window.
5.14
TASKS
Close Task File

This option is used to close an open task.

the open task you want to close, press the button,
use the buttons to highlight Close Task File,
Close Task File by pressing .
The Function Menu will close and the Close Task?
window will open. Use the buttons to select
Yes to close the task or No to exit without closing the
task, and select the button. The instrument will
return to the Task Manager window.
5.15
TASKS
ReOpen Task File

This option is used to reopen a closed task.

the closed task you want to reopen, press the
button, use the buttons to highlight ReOpen
Task File, and then press the button. You may
also select ReOpen Task File by pressing .
The Function Menu will close and the ReOpen
TASK? window will open. Use the buttons to
select Yes to open the closed task or No to exit
without reopening the task, and select the button.
The instrument will return to the Task Manager
window.
5.16
TASKS
Delete Task File

This option is used to delete a task.

the task you want to delete, press the button, use
the buttons to highlight Delete Task File, and
then press the button. You may also select Delete
Task File by pressing .
The Function Menu will close and the Delete Task?
window will open. Use the buttons to select
Yes to delete the task or No to exit without deleting
the task, and select the button. The instrument will
return to the Task Manager window.
5.17
TASKS
Task ID Length
This option is used to set the length of characters that
may be used to identify a task.

the task you want to delete, press the button, use
the buttons to highlight Task ID Length, and
then press the button. You may also select Task
ID Length by pressing .
The Function Menu will close and the Enter Task ID
Length? window will open. Use the ... buttons
to enter the number of digits (16 max) allowed for the
Task ID. If the number of digits is less than 10, press
the button and the instrument will return to the
Task Manager window.. If the number of digits is
greater than 9, the instrument will return to the Task
Manager window.
Note: The Task ID Length must be set to the same value as the
corresponding value that was set in Trilithic Data Manager.
5.18
LINE 6. Line Mode 6

Introduction
The Line Mode allows the user to look at any line on an analog (NTSC) cable TV channel. This is
useful for checking your line blanker or test signal line inserter device for proper operation.
The basic 860 DSP comes equipped with the Line Mode as a standard feature. In order to use
the Line Mode on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with Power Pack Option
(PP-1).
of how to use Line Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Setting Line Number
• Setting Even/Odd Lines
• Viewing Blank Lines
this mode.
Required Setup
To use Line Mode, you are not required to perform any setup procedures.
5.19
LINE

To change the channel or frequency, use the
buttons to highlight the channel number or frequency, use
the buttons to increment the value up and down or
enter the desired channel number or frequency using the
Setting Line Number

To change the line number, use the buttons to
highlight the line number, use the buttons to
channel line number using the alphanumeric keypad, and
5.20
LINE
Setting Even/Odd Fields

To change the between even and odd fields, use the
buttons to highlight the Even/Odd, use the
buttons to increment change the value between Even
and Odd.

the Title Bar. To change the channel plan press the
Plan softkey, the Open File window will open. Use the
buttons to select the channel plan you want
from the list of channel plans available, and then press
the button.
5.21
LINE
Viewing Blank Lines

The accompanying graphics demonstrate the typical types of signal lines.
NTC Composite Signal Multiburst Signal
FCC Composite Signal Blank Line Signal
Regular NTSC Video Signal
5.22
LINE

button while in the Line Mode.
while in Line Mode and are described in Section I: The
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
5.23

Rf
Net
CM Thru 7. CM Thru Mode 7

Introduction
The CM Thru Mode provides a method of using the internal cable modem as a desktop modem
by allowing a customers PC to connect to the external RJ45 port and gain Internet access through
the internal cable modem.
The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the CM Thru Mode as a standard feature. This mode
of how to use CM Thru Mode including:
• Required Setup
this mode.
Required Setup
To use CM Thru Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have
chapter.
If your instrument is equipped with an internal modem, you will need to setup the internal cable
modem; see Section IV: Setup Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, CM/CPE
Settings.
5.24
Rf
Net
CM Thru
Logging on to The Network

Note: If the instrument does not indicate RDY within 10 seconds after
the instrument is turned on, power the unit off and back on. If the RDY
message never shows up, you may not have Ethernet Option (CI-1,
CI-2, CI-3, CI-4, or CI-5) installed on your 860 DSP.

Rf
SLM/Forward input, then select the Net
CM Thru
icon from
the Utility menu. The Logging On To Network
When logon is complete, the CM Thru Mode will be
displayed.
Note: If you have not set the default downstream data carrier frequency
or it is incorrect in may take several minutes for the modem to find the
downstream data carrier.
Measurement Data
The CM Thru Mode displays connections statistics for the internal cable modem. The instrument
5.25
FDR 8. FDR Mode 8

Introduction
The Frequency Domain Reflectometer (FDR) Mode provides a tool for determining the
distance to fault (DTF) of cable systems. The mode works by sending a sweep into the cable and
analyzing the complex reflected wave to determine the distance to various sources of reflection
(opens, shorts, splitters, etc.). The reflecting events are indicated on an amplitude versus distance
display, and markers are used to identify the distance to the source of the reflection, and the return
loss at that point.
of how to use FDR Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Determine if FDR Mode is Available
• Using the FDR Mode
Required Setup
To use FDR Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have completed
5.26
FDR
Determine if FDR Mode is Available

To determine if the FDR Mode option is available on this
instrument, press the Setup softkey, use the
buttons to select the i icon and press the button.
Info
You may also press the to display the Instrument

Information screen.
Use the buttons to select the RF Option Info field.

If the FDR Option is installed, the widow will display the
text FDR : YES.
The Calibration Info field will display the date the FDR
Mode was last calibrated.
5.27
FDR
Using the FDR Mode

The FDR Mode allows the user to find reflection points in a cable network. The following
procedures detail the use of the FDR Mode.
Reference Level
The reference level may be adjusted in 3 dB
increments.
To change the reference level, use the buttons
to highlight the Ref control and use the buttons
to change the reference level.
Velocity of Propagation (VoP)

To adjust the VoP use the buttons to highlight
the VoP control and use the buttons to change
the VoP percentage value.
5.28
FDR
Step Size
To change the frequency of the step size press the
buttons to highlight the Step control, press the
buttons to select 0.5 MHz or 1.0 MHz step
size.
Marker Settings
The instrument displays two frequency-settable
markers as dark vertical lines on the scale. These
markers can be used to make amplitude
measurements of carriers at user-selected
frequencies, or to determine the difference (Delta) in
amplitude between two selected carriers.
To set a marker to a frequency, use the buttons

to highlight Marker A or Marker B, then increment the
buttons. You can also enter a frequency directly using
the alphanumeric keypad and pressing the button.
5.29
FDR
Calc VoP
To calculate distance, press the softkey, use
the buttons to highlight Marker A or Marker B,
and press the button. The distance relative to the
specific marker is displayed next to the Distance
readout in the upper right corner of the FDR Mode
window.
Get VoP
The user may select RG-59, RG-6, RG-11,
Simi-Rigid, or Hardline cable type by pressing the
softkey, use the buttons to highlight the
cable type desired and press the button or you
may also select the numeric key that matches the
desired cable type.
5.30
FDR

button while in the FDR Mode.
while in FDR Mode and are described in Section I: The
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Save Data Log
5.31
Source
9. Source Mode 9

Introduction
The Source Mode configures the 860 DSP or 860 DSPi to function as a return frequency signal
source with settable signal frequency, amplitude and modulation.
You can use Source Mode to “ring out” home and MDU (Multiple Dwelling Unit) cabling, using a
signal level meter or Legacy Guardian Isometer Reverse Leakage Detector to trace cabling. You
can also inject the test signal into the house wiring and use the Isometer to find breaks and loose
connections that would admit ingress.
In order to use the Source Mode on your 860 DSP, the instrument must be equipped with Return
Sweep Receiver Option (SR-1) or Return Tester Option (VP-1). In order to use the Source Mode
on your 860 DSPi, the instrument must be equipped with Power Pack Option (PP-1) and Return
Sweep Receiver Option (SR-1) or Return Tester Option (VP-1).
This section will provide you with the basic understanding of how to use Source Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Using Source Mode
• Changing Frequency Step Size
Note: Source Mode is an optional function of the 860 DSP and

Mode. If you do not have Source Mode installed in your instrument,
you may call Trilithic at (800) 344-2412 to order this option and start
using it today.
this mode.
5.32
Source
Required Setup
To use Source Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have
chapter.
Using Source Mode

To start using the Source Mode, select the Start
softkey. The graph will no longer display the text RF Off
and the source signal will be displayed.
To stop using the Source Mode, select the Stop

softkey. The graph will no longer display the source
signal and the text RF Off will be displayed.
5.33
Source
Setting Frequency
press the button.
Adjusting Tx Level
To change the output transmit level, use the
buttons to highlight Tx and use the buttons to
5.34
Source

To change the modulation type, press the Modulation
softkey, use the buttons to highlight the desired
modulation type, and press the button. You may also
select the desired modulation type by pressing the
The signal generated by the Source Mode can have
several different modulation types as follows:
CW: No modulation.
Pulse: 100% AM square-wave modulation at a 1
kHz rate. The modulation produces an audible tone
in the speaker of a signal level meter. This can simplify identification of cables in MDUs.
Tag: The signal is Channel Tagged at a 20 Hz rate to be compatible with the Legacy
Guardian Isometer.
Sweep 42: The signal is swept across the reverse spectrum range of 5 MHz to 42 MHz.
Seeep 65: The signal is swept across the reverse spectrum range of 5 MHz to 65 MHz.
Single: The signal is a single chirp used to simulate fast ingress signals.
Repeat: The signal is a repeating chirp used to simulate fast ingress signals.
Loop Back: This signal is transmitted from the Reverse/Both connection and is read using
the SLM/Forward connection. This signal is used to test the properties of cables, pads, and
transmitters. To “zero out” the Loop Back modulation, press the Zero softkey.
5.35
Source

To change the frequency step size, press the
frequency step, and then press the button. You may
also select the desired frequency step by pressing the
The third frequency step, in this case 1 MHz, is the
Mode Settings.

button while in the Source Mode.
while in Source Mode:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
• Pulse Width

Menu Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
5.36
Source
Pulse Width
This option is used to enter the pulse width in
milliseconds.
The pulse width is used for the Single and Repeat
modulation types.
buttons to highlight Pulse Width, and then
press the button. You may also select Pulse
Width by pressing .
• The Function Menu will close and the Enter
Pulse Width in msec window will open.
• Enter the pulse width value using the
Required Setup
5.37
QAM Src 10. QAM Source Mode 10

Introduction
QAM Source Mode configures the instrument to function as a QAM signal source with settable
signal modulation and symbol rate. The basic 860 DSPi comes equipped with the QAM Source
Mode as a standard feature. This mode is not available for the 860 DSP in any configuration.
understanding of how to use QAM Source Mode
including:
• Required Setup
• Using QAM Source Mode
• Changing Symbol Rate
• Changing Frequency Step Size
this mode.
Note: If your instrument is not equipped with the latest internal cable
modem, contact Trilithic for details on how to upgrade your instrument.
Required Setup
To use QAM Source Mode, you will need to set up some basic parameters, be sure you have
chapter.
To use QAM Source Mode, you will need to setup the internal cable modem, be sure you have
5.38
QAM Src
Using QAM Source Mode

To start using the QAM Source Mode, select the Start
softkey. The graph will no longer display the text RF OFF
and the source signal will be displayed.
To stop using the QAM Source Mode, select the Stop

softkey. The graph will no longer display the source
signal and the text RF Off will be displayed.
5.39
QAM Src
Setting Frequency
press the button.
Adjusting Tx Level
To change the Output Transmit Level (Tx), use the
buttons to highlight the Tx level, use the buttons to
level using the alphanumeric keypad, and then press the
button.
5.40
QAM Src

To change the modulation type, press the Modulation softkey,
use the buttons to highlight the desired modulation
type, and press the button. You may also select the
desired modulation type by pressing the corresponding
The signal generated by the QAM Source Mode can
have several different modulation types as follows:
QPSK: This represents four points on the
constellation diagram, equispaced around a circle.
With four phases, QPSK can encode two bits per
symbol.
16 QAM: This represents 4 different phases and 4 different amplitudes that are used for a
total of 16 different symbols.
64 QAM: This represents 8 different phases and 8 different amplitudes that are used for a
total of 64 different symbols.
The modulation type, in this case 64 QAM, that is marked with and asterisk (*) is the currently
selected modulation type.
5.41
QAM Src
Changing Symbol Rate

To change the symbol rate, press the Freq Step softkey, use
the buttons to highlight the desired symbol rate,
and then press the button. You may also select the
desired symbol rate by pressing the corresponding
The symbol rate, in this case 5120 ksps, that is marked
with and asterisk (*) is the currently selected symbol rate.
CAUTION: Changing the symbol rate will change the bandwidth of your
signal. The screen shows an approximation of this effect but the actual
response may be slightly wider than shown. Be careful when changing
the symbol rate if you have placed your QAM source signal close to
active return band traffic.

To change the frequency step size, press the Freq Step
frequency step, and then press the button. You may
also select the desired frequency step by pressing the
The third frequency step, in this case 1 MHz, is the
Mode Settings.
5.42
QAM Src

button while in the QAM Source Mode.
while in QAM Source Mode and are described in
Options:
• Screen Capture
• Context Help
5.43
Wi-Fi 11. Wi-Fi Mode 11

Wi-Fi (802.11 b/g) in the 860 DSPi
The Wi-Fi Mode provided a means for cable technical personnel to verify a company’s Wi-Fi
access points are properly broadcasting adequate field strength and security protocol.
The Wi-Fi Survey Mode can be used on data service installations to verify wireless accessibility
throughout a customer’s home, and to verify that the configured channel is not conflicting with a
neighbor’s access point without actually logging on to the company’s network.
The Wi-Fi adaptor for the 860 DSPi provides a communications path for measurement data, unit
configurations and internet sites, and may also be used to perform common Wi-Fi network
verification tests such as:
• Detects in-range wireless IEEE 802.11 b/g access points and lists SSID’s and channels.
• Displays the up to 10 access points, with the one currently connected highlighted.
• List includes received signal strength in dBm for each access point, and indicates security
enabled/disabled.
• Indicates the type of access point (infrastructure or ad hoc).
This section will provide you with the basic understanding of how to use Wi-Fi Mode including:
• Required Setup
• Selecting the Wi-Fi Option
• Using the Wi-Fi Survey Mode
• Checking the 860 DSPi for Wi-Fi Compatibility
• Zone Configuration
• Using the Wi-Fi Mode
• Workbench Support
Required Setup
To use Wi-Fi Mode, you will need to set up your Wi-Fi adapter. See Section IV: Setup
Functions, Chapter 2: Instrument Setup Mode, Wi-Fi Settings.
5.44
Wi-Fi
Using the Wi-Fi Survey Mode

This mode allows the user to verify a company’s wireless access and parameters. The following
screens display the Wi-Fi parameter for the survey mode of operation.
When the user enters the mode, you can select from a list of configured Wi-Fi zones. Once you
have chosen a Wi-Fi zone, the instrument will connect to the associated Wi-Fi access point and a
list of access points within range is displayed.
The Wi-Fi access point that the meter is currently connected to will appear highlighted by a black
bar.
The list is auto-sorted with the access point with the highest level at the top and a descending
order of received power level.
Up to 10 access points are shown along with their SSID and power level.
If the SSID is unknown, the word unknown is displayed. An asterisk appearing next to an SSID
indicates that security is enabled. Also, the default assumes the access point is part of an
infrastructure mode network.
If an SSID is setup for an ad hoc wireless network, the words “ad hoc” appear next to the SSID.
5.45
Using the Wi-Fi Mode
Perform the following steps to use the Wi-Fi Mode;
Select Wi-Fi as the network login default (similar to ping or cable modem) in the Setup, COM/NET
settings.
When the user activates the network by entering Ping, Trace Route, Browser, etc.; the meter logs
into the Wi-Fi network and functions the same as when connected using the internal cable
modem, or the RJ45 (network adapter) and all network functions should be available.
Alternatively, the user can enter the Wi-Fi survey mode without acquiring an IP address, and the
meter will not attempt to login to the Wi-Fi network. In this mode of operation the survey is
available, but other network related test modes are not. When you exit the survey mode, the meter
automatically powers down the Wi-Fi module.
Note: The meter must either be able to acquire an IP address from the
network, or have been setup with a static IP address if using an ad hoc
network. The Wi-Fi survey mode is also available at this time.
5.46
860 DSP & 860 DSPi
Cable Analyzer
Section VI: Appendix

Specifications
Frequency Range: 5 MHz to 1 GHz
Level Measurement
Range: -40 to +50 dBmV
Resolution: 0.1 dB
± 0.75 dB @ 25º C
Accuracy: ± 2.00 dB (Analog), ± 2.50 dB (Digital) @ -18º C to 50º C Over
Temperature
Carrier-to-Noise
(In-service, non-scrambled standard channels only)
Minimum Input Level
+ 10 dBmV
for Full Range:
Dynamic Range: 50 dB
Resolution: < 0.5 dB
Hum
Minimum Input Level: 0 dBmV
Range: 0% to 5%
Resolution: 0.1%
Accuracy: ± 0.5%
Depth of Modulation
Range: 50% to 100%
Resolution: 0.5%
Audio Demodulation: FM Carriers
860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Section VI: Appendix
6.2
Tilt
Maximum Number of
10
Carriers:
Hi / Lo Delta
0.1 dB
Resolution:
Video, Audio, Pilot, and Digital Carriers; Includes Total Power
Scan:
Measurement
Forward (Sweepless) Sweep Mode

Display Span: User-Definable
Display Scale: 1, 2, 5, or 10 dB/division
Display Range: 6 Vertical Divisions
Sweep Rate (78
~ 500 ms
Channels):
Spectrum Mode
Resolution Bandwidth: 10, 30, 100, and 300 kHz; 1, 3 MHz
Spans: User-Selectable in 10 kHz Steps
Display Scale: 1, 2, 5, or 10 dB/division
Range: 8 Vertical Lines
Detection and Dwell: Selectable Detector Modes (Narrow or Wide) and Dwell Time
Spurious Free
60 dB @ 25º C (+50 dBmV)
Dynamic Range:
Sensitivity: -40 dBmV
6.3
Zero Span Mode
Video Bandwidth: Digital Averaging
Resolution Bandwidth: 10, 30, 100, and 300 kHz; 1, 3 MHz
Pulse Measurement Nominal Level in < 7 ms, ± 2.0 dB from Nominal in 4 ms (300 kHz
Accuracy: RBW)
Sweep Times: 50 ms to 20 sec in 1, 2, 5 Settings
Intermodulation Distortion (CSO/CTB)

Range: Greater Than or Equal to 61.0 dB
Resolution: 0.1 dB
QAM Measurements
ITU J.83 Annex A, B, C QPSK, 16, 32, 64, 128, & 256 QAM
Modulation Types:
(at symbol rates from 2 MSPS to 6.9 MSPS)
Measureable Input 64 QAM: -20 to +50 dBmV (typical)
(Lock) Range: 256 QAM: -15 to +50 dBmV (typical)
Frequency Tuning: 5 MHz to 1 GHz
BER (64 & 256 QAM,
1 x 10-4 to 1 x 10-9
Pre & Post FEC):
64 & 256 QAM, 6 MHz Channel Bandwidth:
Range: 21 to 38 dB, Accuracy (typical): ± 1.5 dB
MER:
64 & 256 QAM, 8 MHz Channel Bandwidth:
Range: 21 to 35 dB, Accuracy (typical): ± 2.5 dB
64 QAM, 6 or 8 MHz Channel:
Range: 1.1% to 8.1%
Accuracy: ± 0.5% (1.1% to 2.0%), ± 1.0% (2.1% to 4.2%),
EVM:
± 1.6% (4.3% to 8.1%)
(Software QAM Only)
256 QAM, 6 or 8 MHz Channel:
Range: 1.1% to 5.3%
Accuracy: ± 0.5% (1.1% to 2.0%), ± 0.8% (2.1% to 4.2%)
6.4
QAM Level Measurement
Signal Types: QPSK; QAM (16, 32, 64, 128, & 256)
Range: -40 to +50 dBmV
Accuracy: ± 1.25 dB @ 25º C
QAM Signal Generator

Signal Types: QPSK; QAM (16, 32, & 64)
Symbol Rates: 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, & 5120 kSym/Sec
Range: +20 to +58 dBmV
MER: > 38 dB
Frequency Range: 5 MHz to 42 MHz
VP-1 or SR-1 Option
TX Frequency Range: 5 MHz to 65 MHz
RX Link Frequency
50 MHz to 92 MHz
Range:
TX Level Range: 20 dBmV to 55 dBmV
TC Level Accuracy: ± 0.35 dB @ 25º C
RX Link Range: -20 dBmV to +20 dBmV
Power Source
Charging Time: 4 Hours
~ 4 Hours (860 DSP In Level Mode)
Operating Time:
~ 6 Hours (860 DSPi in Level Mode)
Physical
Weight: 4.75 lbs
Operating Temperature
-18º C to +50º C (0º F to 122º F)
Range:
6.5
Warranty Information
Trilithic, Inc. warrants that each part of this product will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship, under normal use, operating conditions and service for a period of two (2) years
from date of delivery. Trilithic, Inc.’s obligation under this Warranty shall be limited, at Trilithic,
Inc.’s sole option, to replacing the product, or to replacing or repairing any defective part, F.O.B.
Indianapolis, Indiana; provided that the Buyer shall give Trilithic, Inc. written notice.
Batteries are not included or covered by this Warranty.
The remedy set forth herein shall be the only remedy available to the Buyer under this Warranty
and in no event shall Trilithic, Inc. be liable for incidental or consequential damages for any alleged
breach of this Warranty. This Warranty shall not apply to any part of the product which, without fault
of Trilithic, Inc., has been subject to alteration, failure caused by a part not supplied by Trilithic, Inc.,
accident, fire or other casualty, negligence or misuse, or to any cause whatsoever other than as a
result of a defect.
Except for the warranty and exclusions set forth above, and the warranties, if any, available to the
Buyer from those who supply Trilithic, Inc., there are no warranties, expressed or implied (including
without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability of fitness), with respect to the
condition of the product or its suitability for any use intended for it by the Buyer or by the purchaser
from the Buyer.
6.6
9710 Park Davis Drive
Indianapolis, IN 46235
(317) 895-3600
www.trilithic.com
P/N 0010218004 03/10 Made in U.S.A.

860 DSP and 860 Dspi Operation Manual Discontinued Manuals User Guides en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

860 DSP and 860 Dspi Operation Manual Discontinued Manuals User Guides en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

860 DSP and 860 Dspi Operation Manual Discontinued Manuals User Guides en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

860 DSP & 860 DSPi

Section II: Section III:

Section IV: Section V:

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

860 DSP & 860 DSPi - Operation Manual, Table of Contents

Section I: The Basics

Where to Get Technical Support

Note: A note is information that will be of assistance to you related to the

CAUTION: A caution alerts you to any condition that could cause a

WARNING: A warning alerts you to any condition that could cause

WARNING: The maximum “RF” input voltage to the meter is 90 V

CAUTION: The accuracy of the meter may be affected when in a strong

CAUTION: Do not use the instrument in any manner not recommended

860 DSP and 860 DSPi Base Models

Durability and Convenience

WARNING: Never use a shoulder strap while climbing or working where

Data File Transfer

Updates and Adding Options

Replacing the Battery

Battery Access Latch (located below the PC cable

CAUTION: Be sure your instrument is turned OFF before removing the

Note: The introduction screen may be customized to include the user

Main Display Area

Input/Output Helper Icons

Note: For more detailed and specific instructions on setup or specific

Let’s Get Started!

Note: The introduction screen may be customized to include the user

Note: The labels and the arrangement of the softkeys in these

Note: If the instrument “locks up” or does not respond to user

To use this option, press the button, use the

To use this option, press the button, use the

To use this option, press the button, use the

• When done reading the help file, press the

To use this option, press the button, use the

Once the file name has been entered, press the

Select Network Port

To use this option, press the button, use the

Internal Cable Modem

the Installer Menu. The Logging On To Network

The Logging On To Network window will show the